Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
-
Upload
satyapatna -
Category
Documents
-
view
237 -
download
0
Transcript of Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 1/494
SAP AG 2004
SAPCRM mySAP CRM Solution Overview
SAPCRM mySAP CRM Solution
Overview
THE BEST RUN BUSINESSES RUN SAP
© SAP AG 2003
CR700mySAP CRM Service(Release SAP CRM 4.0)
SAP R/3, SAP CRM 4.0 (BBP release) 2004/Q2
Material number: 50067915
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 2/494
SAP AG 2004
Copyright 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted inany form or for any purpose without the express permission of
SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed
without prior notice.
Copyright
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of
other software vendors.
Microsoft, Windows, Outlook, and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. IBM, DB2, DB2 Universal Database, OS/2, Parallel Sysplex, MVS/ESA, AIX, S/390, AS/400, OS/390, OS/400,
iSeries, pSeries, xSeries, zSeries, z/OS, AFP, Intelligent Miner, WebSphere, Netfinity, Tivoli, and Informix are
trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation.
UNIX, X/Open, OSF/1, and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open Group.
Citrix, ICA, Program Neighborhood, MetaFrame, WinFrame, VideoFrame, and MultiWin are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc. HTML, XML, XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide Web
Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technology invented and
implemented by Netscape. MaxDB is a trademark of MySQL AB, Sweden.
SAP, R/3, mySAP, mySAP.com, xApps, xApp, and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as
their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several othercountries all over the world. All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective
companies. Data contained in this document serves informational purposes only. National product specifications
may vary.
These materials are subject to change without notice. These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliatedcompanies ("SAP Group") for informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of any kind, and
SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP
Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such
products and services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 3/494
SAP AG 200 4
Prerequisites
Prerequisites:
CR100 Base Customizing
Recommended:
Study of the mySAP CRM learning map, mySAP CRM SolutionOverview: SAP eBooks (narrated unit slides), SAPTutorials(interactive screencams), and the links to the documentation
Study of learning maps for SAP CRM 3.1 and SAP CRM 4.0 forbetter knowledge of functions
Note: Customers and partners can access the mySAP CRM learning
maps on the Service Marketplace atservice.sap.com/okp . OKP
stands for SAP Knowledge Products.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 4/494
SAP AG 2004
Target Groups and Duration
Target Groups:
SAP R/3 customers and potential SAP customers planning an
implementation of mySAP CRM Service Customers and consultants who need to get detailed knowledge
about service processes in mySAP CRM Service
Those who want to learn the fundamentals of mySAP CRM
Service
Duration:
3 days
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 5/494
SAP AG 2004
mySAP CRM Service: Course Outline
8. Enterprise Intelligence
9. E-Service10. Service Analytics
Appendix
1. Overview of CRM Service
2. Installed Base; Individual
Object
3. Service Contract & Entitlement
4. Planned Services
5. Service Order Management
6. Complaints and Returns
7. In-House Repair
Day 3
Day 1 Day 2
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 6/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 7/494
© SAP AG CR700 1-1
SAP AG 2004
Overview of mySAP CRM Service: Course Outline
6. Complaints and Returns
7. In-House Repair
8. Enterprise Intelligence
9. E-Service
10. Service Analytics
Appendix
1. Overview of CRM Service
2. Installed Base; Individual
Object
3. Service Contract & Entitlement
4. Planned Services
5. Service Order Management
Day 3
Day 1 Day 2
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 8/494
© SAP AG CR700 1-2
SAP AG 2004
mySAP CRM Service
Overview of mySAP CRM Service
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 9/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 10/494
© SAP AG CR700 1-4
SAP AG 2004
Your enterprise has selected mySAP CRM as its
customer relationship management solution.
Therefore, you want to become familiar with the key
capabilities mySAP CRM service offers.
In addition, you want to learn about mySAP CRM
architecture and technology and find out what
different user interfaces are available.
mySAP CRM Service: Business Scenario
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 11/494
© SAP AG CR700 1-5
SAP AG 2004
Drives mySAP CRM as the
Most Advanced CRM Solution in the Market
People-CentricConnected
Collaborative Industry Specific
Multi Channel Customer Interactions
mySAP CRM: Technology & Architecture - Overview
mySAP CRM utilizes the SAP WEB APPLICATION SERVER to ensure that all other mySAP CRMBusiness Suite solutions (or similar solutions through other vendors) are driven towards complete
customer focus.
Through its People Centric PORTAL INFRASTRUCTURE delivering unique ROLE MANAGEMENT
AND PERSONALIZATION capability, mySAP CRM empowers individuals and drives performance.
SAP’s EXCHANGE INFRASTRUCTURE facilitates collaboration across company boundaries.
And, mySAP CRM’s core BUSINESS CONFIGURATION industry processes ensure that uniquely
tailored CRM solutions are driven to meet specific industry need.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 12/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 13/494
© SAP AG CR700 1-7
SAP AG 2004
mySAP CRM Service: Solution
The Solution is Complete
Rich Functionality and
Supporting Capabilities mySAP CRM Service
Enables Unparalleled Customer
Service and Fulfillment
Enterprise Service
Customer Service in theInteraction Center
Field Service
E-Service
Service Analytics
Today’s complex customer problems require a deployable mySAP CRM solution that can directlyaddress specific challenges regardless of where or when they occur in the cycle of interacting with,
selling to and servicing an organization’s customers.
mySAP CRM blends deep functional capabilities in the core areas of Marketing, Sales and Service with
award-winning Analytics that are directly embedded into the primary interaction channels with which
organizations engage their customers.
All of this enables the closed loop interaction cycle, underlined mySAP CRM‘s
unique value propositions.
mySAP CRM is built on an open, reliable, secure and scalable technology platform.
The strong and complete services offering of SAP helps to quickly implement mySAP CRM and
supports the ongoing optimization of the solution environment.
The mySAP CRM Service solution offers:
Enterprise service Customer service in the Interaction Center
Field Service
E-Service
Service Analytics
This course will primarily focus on Enterprise Service.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 14/494
© SAP AG CR700 1-8
SAP AG 2004
mySAP CRM Service: Key Capabilities
Enterprise ServiceService Planning &
Forecasting
Customer Service &
Support
Resource Planning &
Optimization
Service Operations
ManagementProfessional Services
• Planned Services
• Counter Based Planning• Performance Based Planning
• Simulation of Service Plans
• Strategic Service Planning
• Resource Planning Tool
• Appointment Scheduling• Multi Channel Integration
• Qualifications for
Resource Optimization
• Project Management
• Project Resource Planning• Opportunity Management
• Engagement Management
• Service within the Interaction Center
• Service Order & Requests• Complaints & Returns
• Contracts & Entitlements
• Installed Base
• Resource Planning
• Case Management
• Warranty Management
• Installed Base
• Returns Processing• In-House Repair
• Resource Planning
• Service Order & Requests
• Contracts & Entitlements, Planned Services
• Financial/Controlling Integration
• Service Operations Analytics
Core Functionality Feature Highlights
Service Planning and Forecasting:mySAP SAP enables an organization to proactively maintain products for optimal performance and
create consistent revenue streams for the service business.
Customer Service and Support:
mySAP SAP provides timely resolution to customer issues by connecting the entire service process from
initial customer contact through to final resolution.
Resource Planning and Optimization:
The resource planning and optimization capabilities of mySAP CRM enable resource planners to plan
long-term resource strategies and optimize short-term scheduling tactics.
Service Operations Management:
Service Operations Management is the central operations control for the management of the service
enterprise in mySAP SAP.
Professional Services:mySAP CRM enables service providers to meet current and future client-centric business needs.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 15/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 16/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 17/494
© SAP AG CR700 1-11
SAP AG 2004
Vendor Vendor
PatientPatient
Borrower Borrower
Neutral
Persons and organizations
Cross-application
Open infrastructure
Integration through operational concepts
TenantTenant
Customer Customer
Accounts
Receivable
Accounts
Receivable
Creditor Creditor Business
Partner
Business Partner Relationships
EmployeeEmployee
Manu-
facturing
Plant
Manu-
facturing
Plant
mySAP CRM Service: Business Partner
Vendor Vendor
Manu-
facturing
Plant
Manu-
facturing
Plant
Business partners are at the center of business transactions, and thus the center of business interest. Allrelevant information about a business partner must therefore be available quickly in consolidated form.
The customer, therefore, needs to have a central and comprehensive view of the business partner.
A business partner can only be created once, regardless of the business transactions in which it
participates. For example, if a company is both a customer and a vendor, it is still one and the same
business partner.
However, a business partner can figure in a company in other ways. Depending on the specific business
processes in which a business partner participates, the information required about the business partner
may vary considerably.
For example, for the goods delivery process, information on inco-terms and delivery conditions is
required; whereas, for the sales order processing, information on delivery dates and payment conditions
is relevant.
A business partner can be in contact with other business partners. These relationships can be verydifferent in nature (for example, a marriage, contact person, company relationships).
The SAP Business Partner provides functions that fulfill these business processes. A business partner is
created only once in the system, but can take on several different roles. The different relationships
between business partners can also be defined.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 18/494
© SAP AG CR700 1-12
SAP AG 2004
Level 2
Level 3
Global ServiceGlobal Service
EuropeEuropeAmericasAmericas
North AmericaNorth America
USAUSA
CaliforniaCalifornia
Office S.F.Office S.F.
Berlin OfficeBerlin Office
FranceFranceSouth AmericaSouth America
OfficeOffice L.A.L.A.
GermanyGermany
Group SF1Group SF1 Group SF2Group SF2
Group B2Group B2Group B1Group B1
Munich OfficeMunich Office
Level 1
Level 4
Level 5
Level 6
mySAP CRM Service: Organization Possibilities
A part of an international organization:
Organizational units for mySAP CRM Service have to be permitted for the scenario Service. The Service Organization indicator marks the selected organizational unit as a service organization.
Organizational units that are responsible for executing services and that should be displayed in the
resource planning tool have to be flagged as Service Team.
You can assign a resource planner position to a service team using Goto → Resource Planner
Assignment .
The system users or business partners assigned to this position are the resource planners who use the
resource planning tool.
The organizational unit will appear under My Service Teams when the resource planner starts the
resource planning tool.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 19/494
© SAP AG CR700 1-13
SAP AG 2004
mySAP CRM Service: Organizational Unit
Berlin Office
Group B2Group B1
Munich Office
Level 4
JaneJane Miller
Jane Miller
ServiceService
RepresentativeRepresentative
Service Manager Service Manager Position
Employee
Position
User
Positions and holders assigned to an organizational unit:
Organizational Unit An organizational object (object type key O), which is used to form the basis of an organizational plan.
Organizational units are functional units of an enterprise. Depending on how task distribution is
organized in an enterprise, these can be, for example, departments, groups, or project teams.
Position
An organizational object (object type key S) which shows the functional task distribution of individual
items and their reporting structure in the organizational plan. In CRM, positions could be, for example,
sales manager, sales representative, Interaction Center manager or Interaction Center agent.
Holders (employees or CRM users) can be assigned to one or more positions.
Employee / User
Employees and users are persons assigned to a position. A person can be a CRM business partner with
the role Employee (object type key BP) or only a CRM User (object type key US) that is assigned to a
position in an organizational plan.By assigning an employee or a user to a position, you can show where an employee is assigned
organizationally in a company (what his function is).
Assigning an employee is recommended because an employee master contains more business data than a
user.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 20/494
© SAP AG CR700 1-14
SAP AG 2004
Products
are differentiated according to
product categories
Products
are differentiated according to
product categories
mySAP CRM Service: Product Master
Financing
Service
Material
Warranties
The product master delivers information about all the products a business buys and sells.Products can be material goods (for example, a PC) or non-material goods (such as services like PC
maintenance).
The product master is the central source of product-specific data. This data is stored in individual
product master records. A product master record contains the data needed for product management. This
data can be sub-divided as follows:
Data that describes the product (such as size and weight)
Data with control functions (such as item category group, which determines the item category of items
in a CRM sales order)
In order to control product-specific data, product master data is split up into the following groups
(product categories):
Material: All products in the conventional sense, for example, PCs, tables, lamps, software.
Service: All services, such as maintenance, preventative maintenance. Financing: Financial products, such as leasing
Warranties: Warranties are guarantees made by a manufacturer, vendor, or seller to a customer to
provide services for a certain period of time wholly or in part without charge.
Different product-specific data is obtained according to the selected product category.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 21/494
© SAP AG CR700 1-15
SAP AG 2004
mySAP CRM Service: Product Category Service
Service Use in:
Service Process Item
Service Confirmation Item
Service Contract Item
Set types for Services:
Basic data: base unit
Transaction control fields
Duration of work
Resource requirements
Default values for servicecontracts and warranties
Products with category Service are maintained in the CRM system and don’t have to be transferred to theR/3 system. Set types appear as sub-screens on tab pages in product maintenance and are assigned to in
the Maintain Categories and Hierarchies.
The base unit of measure can be maintained in product maintenance only if the product was created in
the CRM system.
Transaction control fields contain the item category group, which is used to determine the item
category for a transaction item.
The duration of work is used as a default value in the service process item. It is then available as
information in subsequent resource planning. Resource requirements contain a default rule specifying
how the executing service organization, which is to perform the service, is determined automatically
in the service process item.
The default values for service contracts are the service profile and response profile. The service profile
defines the times when a customer is entitled to a service. You can specify the availability times in theservice profile. The response profile is used to generate date and time intervals for the performance of
service tasks. The system calculates the time interval within which a predefined task must be
performed with reference to the service profile to which the response profile is assigned. This set type
is available for service products for contracts.
Additionally to the comparable information given concerning service contracts you before you can
issue warranties, you must define basic conditions and requirements. These conditions and
requirements can be based specifically on your company, your products, your customers, and your
customer group, and differ from country to country or region to region.
The product type Warranty can be used in CRM Service for these purposes.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 22/494
© SAP AG CR700 1-16
Warranties can be categorized as follows:
- Category of warranty: customer warranty, vendor warranty
- Validity: time-dependent, counter-dependent, time-dependent, and counter-dependent
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 23/494
© SAP AG CR700 1-17
SAP AG 2004
Overview of CRM Service: Unit Summary
You are now able to
Describe the integrated mySAP CRMarchitecture and technology
Provide a survey of the mySAP CRM Service solution
Describe the mySAP CRM Service key capabilities
Describe the different mySAP CRM Service
user interface options
Describe the relevant mySAP CRM Service data
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 24/494
© SAP AG CR700 1-18
Exercises
Unit: Introduction - CRM Service Overview
Topic: Service Products in SAP GUI and PCC UI
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Create service products
• Identify the different kinds of service products
• Describe the build-up of the two different user interfaces(SAP GUI and PC UI)
Your organization offers various services for its customers. Since you
chose mySAP Customer Relationship Management as a solution, you
would like to become familiar with it.
1-1 Create a new service product that represents the service you provide to a customer inSAP GUI.
1-1-1 Log on to the CRM system. The trainer will provide a user name and password.
1-1-2 Which product types are available?
____________________________________________________________
Define the different product types.
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
1-1-3 Create a product master with product type Service and category SRV_SERV.
(Service: Purchasing).
1-1-4 Enter Product ID SRV## (## is your group number) and the Description
Technician Work Hour ##.
1-1-5 The Item category group is SRVO (service item), the Base unit H (hour).
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 25/494
© SAP AG CR700 1-19
1-1-6 The price for one work hour in sales organization Sales US and distribution
channel 14 (service) is 100.00 USD (US Dollar).
Select Condition type 0PR0 (price) for key combination sales
organization/distribution channel/product.
1-1-7 Assign the product to sales organization Sales US and distribution channel 14
(service), division 00. The sales unit in this sales area should be H (hour).1-1-8 The duration of work should be one H (hour).
1-1-9 Save your service master of product type service.
1-1-10 Your product should be a service for product IT1006 (Laserprinter Print-it now).
Change product IT1006 and enter product SRV## as a service for it.
Save your product.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 26/494
© SAP AG CR700 1-20
OPTIONAL:
1-2 Because you are familiar with the process of creating a service product in SAP GUI and
named the different sections of the SAP GUI screen, you will now search for your newlycreated service product in the SAP portal to get to know this new interface, too.
1-2-1 Log on to the portal with user and password provided by your trainer.
1-2-2 Define the role concept in the portal. ____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
1-2-3 Describe the two different types of roles and give an example.
Type 1
___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________
Example:
___________________________________________________________
Type 2 ___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
Example:
___________________________________________________________
1-2-4 Open the Products area.1-2-5 Search for the product IT1006 using Advanced Search. (You could alternatively
search using Fast Search).
1-2-6 Browse through the different tabs and have a look at the data.
What happens after opening the Conditions tab?
___________________________________________________________
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 27/494
© SAP AG CR700 1-21
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 28/494
© SAP AG CR700 1-22
Solutions
Unit: Introduction - CRM Service Overview
Topic: Service Products in SAP GUI and PCC UI
1-1 Create a new service product that represents the service you provide to a customer inSAP GUI.
1-1-1 Log on to the CRM system. The trainer will provide user and password.
Choose SAP menu → Master Data → Products → Maintain Products
(COMMPR01).
1-1-2 There are four product types available:• Material:
All products in conventional sense, for example, PCs, tables, software.
• Service:
All products, such as maintenance, preventative maintenance.
• Financing:Financial products, such as leasing.
• Warranty:
Guarantees made by a manufacturer, vendor, or seller to a customer to
provide services for a certain period of time wholly or in part without
charge.Create a service product master.
Select Service.
Field Name or Data Type Values
For Category SRV_SERV
(Service: Purchasing)
Choose Continue.
1-1-4 General Data:
Field Name or Data Type Values
Service SRV##
Description Technician Work Hour ##
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 29/494
© SAP AG CR700 1-23
1-1-5 Service tab:
Field Name or Data Type Values
Item Category Group SRVO
Base Unit of Measure H (hour)
1-1-6 Conditions tab:
Field Name or Data Type Values
CTyp (= Condition Type) 0PR0 (Price)
Selection of key combination SAP004(Sales Organization
/Distribution Channel/Product)
Sales Organization Sales US
Distribution Channel 14
Amount 100.00 (e.g.)
Currency USD (US Dollar)
1-1-7 Sales & Distribution tab:
Select Assign.
Field Name or Data Type Values
Sales Organization Sales US
Distribution Channel 14
Select Enter .Sales: Control Fields / Quantities:
Field Name or Data Type Values
Sales Unit H (hour)
1-1-8 Service tab:Duration of Work:
Field Name or Data Type Values
Duration of Work 1 H (hour)
1-1-9 Save.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 30/494
© SAP AG CR700 1-24
1-1-10 Assign your product as a service for product IT10006.
Choose Open Product
Field Name or Data Type Values
Product ID IT1006 (Laserprinter Print-it now)
Select Continue ( Enter).
Make sure you are in change mode. If not, use the Display <-> Change icon.
Choose Relationships.
Choose the Services tab:
Field Name or Data Type Values
Product SRV##
(Technician Work Hour)
Save.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 31/494
© SAP AG CR700 1-25
OPTIONAL:
1-2 Become familiar with SAP portal.
1-2-1 Log on to the portal with the user name and password provided by your trainer.
1-2-2 Definition of the role concept in the portal:
• People-Centric CRM packages all content needed to perform a job function
as a role
• A role consists of work-sets for each business activity
• Each work-set provides pages to access all underlying applications neededto perform a task
1-2-3 There are two different types of roles:1) Transaction-driven roles:
• Focus on transactions to find, modify, or create data
• Provide access to transactions very quickly via 2nd-level navigation
• Have overview pages only for each entry in the 2nd-level navigation
• Have no detail navigation iView
• Focus on transaction-driven pages
Example of transaction-driven roles:
• Service Representative2) Information-driven roles:
• Focus on structured and unstructured information, reporting
• Provide overview pages to every kind of object
• Navigate between the pages via detail navigation on third level
• Focus on content from different sources in iViews
Example of transaction-driven roles:
• Service Manager
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 32/494
© SAP AG CR700 1-26
1-2-4 Open the products area. Select Products & Installations → Products.
1-2-5 Choose Open Advanced Search to search for the product IT1006.(You could also search using Fast Search).
Advanced Search pop-up:
Field Name or Data Type Values
Search Product
By General
Product Type Material
ID/Description IT1006
Choose Go.
1-2-6 Browse through the different tabs and have a look at the data.
What happens after opening the Conditions tab?
When opening the Conditions tab, a second tab area appears.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 33/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-1
SAP AG 2004
Installed Base
6. Complaints and Returns
7. In-House Repair
8. Enterprise Intelligence
9. E-Service
10. Service Analytics
Appendix
1. Overview of CRM Service
2. Installed Base; Individual
Object
3. Service Contract & Entitlement
4. Planned Services
5. Service Order Management
Day 3
Day 1 Day 2
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 34/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-2
SAP AG 2004
Installed Base
Installed Base IBase) Management
Installed Base IBase) Customizing
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 35/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-3
SAP AG 2004
Installed Base: Unit Objectives
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to
Identify functions and contents of IBase
Create and know how to work with an IBase
Perform the customizing settings for IBase
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 36/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-4
SAP AG 2004
Installed Base: Business Scenario
Your customer’s technical equipment for
which they need services to be provided.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 37/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-5
SAP AG 2004
Components
Product
Text
Installed base
Individual object
Customer-specific types
Components
Header
Category
External ID Description
Status (system/user)
Authorization Group
Partners
Address
Documents
Partners
Address
Documents
Installed Base: Structure
The IBases at the uppermost level (~ header) are used to structure the customer or business partner (forexample, company X, department Y, building M, branch A).
The IBase components are found at a lower level.
The set of installed objects at the customer’s site can be used to:
Determine the exact object for which a problem has been reported.
Determine in detail what the transaction refers to (for example, visit by field service representative,
repair by a service employee).
Determine which object is affected and the parts it consists of
(important information for technicians).
Document changes made to objects.
In addition to this direct use of the IBases data for individual service processes with the customer, IBase
data also forms the basis for additional evaluations, such as activities covered by service contracts and
statistics.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 38/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-6
SAP AG 2004
Installed Base: Example of Component Structure
Client Server Installation xyzSold-to Party: Company 4711
Status: Operating
Contact Person: John Summer
Address: Walldorf, Neurottstr. 16
Contact Person: Pat Winter
Address: Rot, Max-Planck-Str. 1Application Server 02
Hard drive 50GB
RAM
Motherboard
Windows NT
Application Server 01
Hard drive 40GB
RAM
Motherboard
Unix
Identification: HD-98765
Identification: HD-43210
Individual Object ...
Installed Base ...
Text ...
Product ...Installed Base
Product Component
Text Component
Individual Object
You can use the IBases for storing your customer‘s structures and objects such as in the above examplefor technical equipments.
You can use different types of components within IBases:
Product components.
Text components.
- Text components can also be used for structure notes.
IBases as a component of another IBase.
Individual objects
- An individual object can only be assigned to one IBase component.
Therefore individual objects may not be copied.
- (An individual object can exist independent from an IBase).
Customer specific component types.
- For example, cars, washing machines, telephones and so on. can be grouped in object families.- An object family can be assigned to multiple categories
You can mix all component types within one structure in any way.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 39/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-7
SAP AG 2004
Partner and address information
Status management
Time-based representation of IBase, showing
Create, change, display IBase
Relationships
Comparison of two IBase
Tree structure for IBase component navigation
Component structure and component detail view
Installed Base: Functions and Properties
IBase functions and properties: Partner and address information
- Header or component of IBase
- Multiple partners possible (sold-to-party, service employee group, responsible employee)
Status management.
- System status (created, inactive, ...); User status (operating, ...)
Time based representation of IBase, showing.
- Changes to IBase structure
- Adding / removing of IBase components
Create, change, display IBase
- Including changes of IBase in the past
Relationships
- Connecting counter, measurement point, qualification requirement and warranty Display, compare, change two IBases
- Display and compare two different IBases
- Display two different statuses for one IBases for to different times and compare them
- Changes to IBase structure (for example: the move of components between IBases)
Tree structure for installed base component navigation
- Cut, copy, paste
- Drag & drop
Component structure and component detail view
- Subordinate installed bases in installed base
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 40/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-8
SAP AG 2004
Integration
Qualifications
Warranties
Counters
Installed Base: Integration
Qualification:Qualification:
Speaks Spanish fluentlySpeaks Spanish fluently
Qualification:Qualification:
Good hardwareGood hardwareknowledgeknowledge
Qualification:Qualification:
Good projectGood project
management skillsmanagement skills
E.g. printer
Creation and linking of qualification requirements for a service employee to an installed base orcomponents.
Qualification requirements for the service employee...
determine the qualifications required by a service employee for servicing an installed base or the
components of an installed base, for example, welding permission.
are to be checked in the resource planning tool to see that the required qualifications for processing a
service order for a component match with the actual qualifications of the assigned service employee.
Creation and linking of warranties to components of an installed base.
Warranties may contain one ore more of the following...
a defined validity period; a link to an uniquely identified product, installation or object;
Coverage terms for parts, labor, and travel; Influence of pricing and financial management; Purchasing
information and tracking of aggregate warranty cost.
Option of assigning counters to components of an installed base.Data from counter readings are available for...
Follow-up scenarios:
Trigger maintenance order when specified counter reading is reached;
Check warranty claims (for example, based on operating hours).
Evaluation scenarios:
Reporting on usage, capacity; Calculation of consumption.
CRM billing from service documents:
Based on counter readings (for example, consumption).
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 41/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-9
SAP AG 2004
Two Counter Types
Counters
Installed Base: Counter Integration (1)
Measuring points have indicator character :
Non-monotone value outcomes
No overflow value
Typical measuring points:
Thermometer, Speedometer
Special case of a measuring point:
Oil meter reader:
Generally monotone decreasing but
with monotone and non-monotone times Overflow value
Miles
Hour
Speedometer (Miles/Hour)
Counters are measuring points with
counter character :
Monotone, sequenced value outcomes
Overflow value
Planned value
Integrated value check which defines counter as:
Forward counter
Backward counter
Typical counters:
Odometer, electricity meter (forward counter)
Water meter (backward counter)
Odometer (Miles)
Water Meter (Cubic Meter)
Measuring Points
Definition of counter specific wording: Counter Overflow:
The counter overflow indicates the value when the counter is reset to a defined value (in general to
zero), assuming it is a forward counter. (A backward counter resets to the overflow value when it
reaches a defined value (in general, when it reaches zero).
Example (automobile’s odometer):
As soon as the value reaches 99.999,99 (maximum value) the next value that displays will be 0,00
(minimum value).The overflow only affects the visible value displayed on the physical counter.
The system tracks the overall value (100.000,00). An indicator cannot have an overflow value.
- Minimum Value & Maximum Value:
Minimum value and maximum value allowed for this counter. The behavior is different for a
measuring point (indicator) or a counter.
For both, no reading will be accepted with a visible value on a reading less than the Minimum Value.(For a counter, if it is a backward counter and the visible value on the reading is greater than the
visible value on the previous reading, then it is assumed that a rollover has occurred and the overall
value is increased accordingly).
Planned Value:
The planned or target value. This may be used in validation rules or for statistical comparison with
actual values. For a Counter, one must also specify a planned time frame for the planned value.
Example (planned time frame for planned value):
99.999,99 km (~ planned value) per for example, 1 year (~ planned time frame). One uses the
Plan_Time field (for example, 1) in combination with the Plan_Unit field (for example, year) in the
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 42/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 43/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-11
SAP AG 2004
4 different Counter Views
Installed Base: Counter Integration (2)
Business Transaction
View
Administration View
Business transaction related:
• One order:
• Service order
• Service confirmation
• Service plan
• Counter reading entry
Administration View
Counter Search functions e.g.
•
•
Counter creation
•
Create Measuring Point
• Create Counter
Counter Reading functions e.g.
• Create Counter Reading
• Create Multiple
Counter Readings
• Display all Readings
• Display last Reading
Business
Transaction
View
Master Data
View
Administration View
External
View
Master Data View
Master data related e.g.• Counter Creation:
• Create Counter in:
• Individual object
• IBase component
•
Counter administration view: You can reach the counter administration view via the transaction: /ncrm_mpk_admin.
Counter readings relevant to execution of services are recorded for various purposes:
Recording service histories.
For example, recording mileage during technical inspection of a car.
Claiming services.
For example, recording number of times that customer was in contact with consultancy team during
project implementation.
Recording energy consumption.
For example, household gas or electricity readings.
Assessing warranty claims based on consumption.
For example, car warranty is only valid for the first 30,000 miles.
Scheduling service plans. For example, next maintenance work should be scheduled after 1000 operating hours.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 44/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 45/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-13
SAP AG 2004
Reporting
Change of IBase in the past
Installed Base: Reporting
Maintenance of IBase in the past: IBase Maintenance (incl. enhancements for mobile clients):
IBase transports exact history of all changes made in the life cycle to the database.
Visualizes IBase changes.
- For entire IBase.
- For each IBase component.
3.0: Changes in IBase with current date/time only.
(IBase data can only be displayed in the mobile client. Changes to the data are
only possible in CRM online [exception: moving a component within an IBase]).
4.0: Changes of IBase can be backdated until the last change of IBase.
(Creation of an IBase and its components; copy & paste for component creation;
customer-specific components supported [set types are downloaded from CRM enterprise];
serialized components [creation & modification of individual objects];structural changes across IBases; partner maintenance; attribute maintenance;
Ibase history – display of structure on a previous date; notes & attachments exchange).
Action Log:
Who made what changes to IBase in the past at a glance
Reports where components of IBase are used
Reports all service orders for an IBase component
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 46/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-14
SAP AG 2004
Middleware / R/3 Integration
External interface (XIF) for IBase
Migration of R/3 equipments into CRM IBase
Enhancement of the equipment validation
service for R/3 serial numbers
Installed Base: Middleware - R/3 Integration
CRM Server
SAP Web
Application Server
CRM Middleware CRM Server
Applications
CRM Adapter
(Validation
Service)
External
Interface
Adapter
Groupware
Adapter
R/3 Adapter
Mobile Client
Adapter
BW Adapter R/3
External System
(Non SAP)
R/3 Equipments
Data Transfer of Equipments: One leading system for data changes:
- CRM: installed base changes in CRM w/o synchronization to R/3.
- R/3: installed base changes into CRM via update from R/3 only.
Initial/delta download communication via CRM Middleware.
Data transfer using external interface (XIF).
Data transfer from R/3 to CRM:
- Restricted to equipment and hierarchies.
- Mapped as individual objects.
Integration of CRM Installed Base with R/3 Master Data:
High tech customers are extensively using serial number to represent individual object in R/3.
Difference between serial numbers and equipments is a flag (both are in the same table).
Validation of equipments and serial numbers are separated due to this flag. Equipments turn to installed bases, serial numbers turn to individual objects.
The components of the equipments are stored as pointers on individual objects.
Only equipments are validated in a second step and routed to the mobile bridge.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 47/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-15
SAP AG 2004
People-centric UI
For for example, IBase
Installed Base: People-Centric User Interface (UI)
Orientation Area
Search Area
Result List
Detail Area 1
Detail Area 2
The pattern-based People Centric UI screen design (to exemplify: IBase)with the following five areas:
Orientation area:
Preconfigured user role to preassemble content for complete business tasks and specific needs (for
example, service representative or – service manager: Welcome Mike Burton)
Path: Products & Installations→ Installations
Path: Products & Installations→ Individual objects)
Search area:
Fast search (personalization and configuration possible):- Show field: (e.g.) myFavorites etc.
- Get dropdown list: for example, Installed Base
- Go button triggers the fast search
Open Advanced Search (personalization and configuration possible):- Via Open Advanced Search button you trigger the opening of the Advanced Search area.
Result list:
The results of your (fast) search are shown in the result list.
, 5. Detail areas 1 & 2:
After selecting one result from the result list details concerning this result
can be shown in detail.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 48/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-16
SAP AG 2004
Installed Base: Integration of Individual Object
Service cycle
IIndividual object ...ndividual object ...
IBase ...
Text ...
Product ...
IBase ...
Service Orders
Complaints
In-house repair
Service order and
confirmation
Service contract
Case management
Individual objects enable you: To track those uniquely, identified, specific objects in business processes.
Object history:
- partner history
- attribute / configuration history
- business document history
- object structure
- relationship history
Individual Object with reference to product:
- attribute set types
- relationships
- document links
To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects and support the mappingof business processes that require a unique reference to a specific object.
For example:
- A service contract for an object.
Individual objects are comparable with equipments in R/3.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 49/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-17
SAP AG 2004
Product versus Individual object:
Installed Base: Individual Object versus Product
IObjectProduct
e.g. IP address of a computer e.g. size of RAM of a computer
An individual object provides specific
data, valid for only one, uniquely
identified, single object
A product contains information on the
features of goods or services
With unique
IP number
Product versus Individual Object: The product contains general information about the goods or services it describes. However,
it cannot make a statement about individual objects that could possibly exist for the product.
Individual data that is valid for exactly one object is stored in the Individual object.
That means, that an Individual object is generally identified by a number, fixed relationship or
description. For example:
- ID number: the monitor of a computer with the manufacturer's serial number "xyz„.
- Location: Mr. Smith's washing machine at 25 George Street, London. Although the washing
machine does not have a serial number, it is not likely to be confused with any other washing
machine.
- Building with address: In addition, Individual objects can be used to represent objects relevant to the
business
environment that are not directly either service or sales process objects. You can categorize Individual objects in object families with the same types of object (for example,
household appliances and software licenses).
You can define the attributes that are relevant to each object family for the description of associated
individual objects as individual fields.
You can group the fields according to the requirements for representation on the interface.
Each Individual objects belongs to an object family.
Settings made at the object family level determine which fields
can be maintained for the objects.
All other settings related to objects are also made at the object family level.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 50/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-18
SAP AG 2004
Installed Base: BW Integration of Individual Objects
BW Integration
Retrieve individual objectdata from BW
BW data as a basis for
analytical functions
BW Connection: Enabling evaluation of costs per component and IBase.
Retrieve individual object data from BW.
BW data as a basis for analytical functions.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 51/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-19
SAP AG 2004
Installed Base:Channel Integration of Individual Objects
Interaction Center
Mobile Service - Laptop
E-Service - Internet
Channels
E-Service
Product self-registration
Field Applications
Mobile Service
Interaction Center
Sales, service
and marketing processes
IBase integration into service order: Processing of service orders and requests with reference to any component of a customer’s IBase.
CRM online, internet customer self-service, customer interaction center, mobile service.
IBase integration into service contract:
IBase components used to exactly specify service contract coverage for customers objects.
Service contract information visible from installed base.
IBase integration into interaction center:
Search and display customer’s installed base by partner, address or identification data in CIC
navigation area.
Detailed display of selected installed base in the CIC application area.
Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference
objects or spare part items.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 52/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-20
SAP AG 2004
At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to
Perform the customizing settings for IBase
Installed Base Customizing: Topic Objectives
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 53/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-21
SAP AG 2004
IBase category
Assign user status profile
Permitted component types
Assign partner determination procedure
Customer-specific component types
Individual objects
Object families
Attributes
Set types
Installed Base: Customizing Steps
The installed base category differentiates the business use of installed bases. You can use the SET/GET-Parameter IBV to set a default value for an installed base category.
Component types are SAP data. The settings control the program flow for each read or write access to the
installed base data. If you want to define your own object types, you must program a function group and
a class.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 54/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-22
SAP AG 2004
Steps:
1. Define object family2. Define the fields (attributes)
3. Define groups of fields (set types)
4. Include set types in the API/BDOC structures
5. Define object family (part 2)
6. Create categories for object families
7. Initialise number assignment
8. Reserve set types for an object family
Steps for use in IBase management:
1. Assign object families to IBase categories
2. Define characteristics of object families
In AdditionIndividual Object: Customizing Steps
You can find the complete description of Customizing individual objects in the Implementation Guide(IMG) documentation for the IMG function
Perform Steps for Individual Objects.
Step 4 is necessary only if the changes are to be transported to a different system or if Installed Base data
will be transferred into the CRM system via API.
If you want to use descriptions for the individual objects, you have to assign the set type
COMM_PR_SHTEXT .
The transaction code for step 6 is COMMPROBJ .
Step 7 is done in the product number range maintenance.
You have to create a number range for external numbering.
Step 8 is optional and has to be performed only if you'd like to reserve a set type for individual objects so
that it cannot be used for products.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 55/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 56/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-24
SAP AG 2004
Installed Base: Unit Summary
You are now able to
Identify functions and contents of IBase
Create and know how to work with an IBase
Perform the customizing settings for IBase
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 57/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-25
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 58/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-26
Exercises
Unit: Installed Base and Individual IObjects
Topics:
• Installed Base (IBase)
• Individual Object (IObject)
• Counter
In SAP GUI and PCC UI
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Create an IBase including IObject and Counter
• Maintain an IBase including IObject and Counter
Your customers have technical or other objects. Some of them are
individual while others include counters. The services you provide refer
to these objects.
1-1 Describe Installed Base (IBase).
1-1-1 Define the term IBase. _______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
1-1-2 Outline a scheme of a possible IBase component structure (including all differentcomponents that an IBase can contain).
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 59/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-27
1-2 Create Installed Base (IBase).
1-2-1 Log on to the CRM Service 4.0 training system with user name and password
provided by your trainer.
1-2-2 Choose SAP menu → Master Data → Installed Base → Create Installed Base.
(Transaction: IB51).
1-2-3 Create an Installed Base with IBase category Installed Base.
1-2-4 Enter your group number as external ID ## and the description IBase_Megastore##.
1-2-5 Assign the business partner with name ##MEGASTORE (## = your group number)as main partner with partner function Sold-to Party.
1-2-6 Enter an IBase address.
1-2-7 Assign the following IBase components in a 2-level hierarchy:
1) Products: IT1006 (Laserprinter Print-it now), IT1000 (PC Maxitech 1.200Professional), IT1104 (Colordrop Ink Cartridges). Each of them with quantity 1.
2) Text item Color printer related to the component IT1006 (Laserprinter Print-itnow).
3) You could also assign an IObject to your IBase (but you don’t).
Product versus IObject:What is the characteristic of a product (in comparison to an IObject)?
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
What is the characteristic of an IObject (in comparison to an product)? _____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
1-2-8 Save your first IBase. Note internal IBase number of first IBase.
___________________________________________________________
OPTIONAL:
1-2-9 Create a second IBase in the same way then you did the first one.
1-2-10 Save your second IBase. Note internal number of second IBase. ___________________________________________________________
1-2-11 Assign your second IBase as a component to your first IBase.
1-2-12 Save.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 60/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-28
1-3 Change Installed Base (IBase).
1-3-1 Change your first IBase and replace the component IT1000 (PC Maxitech
1.200 Professional) with component IT1005 (Flatscreen Cormoran 17").
OPTIONAL:
1-4 Display Installed Base (IBase).
1-4-1 Display your Installed Base with valid-on time 10 minutes before actual time.
1-5 Change two Installed Bases (IBases).
1-5-1 Change both IBases you created before. Dismantle one component and install it
in the other installed base.
1-6 Installed Base (IBase) in PC UI.
1-6-1 Log on to the portal with the user name and password provided by your trainer.
1-6-2 Open the Installed Base area.
1-6-3 Search for the IBase you created first using Fast Search.
1-6-4 Look at the General and Detailed data concerning your IBase.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 61/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-29
Unit: Installed Base and Individual Object
Topics: Customizing of Counter
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Maintain the customizing settings for Counters
2-1 Customize counter settings.
2-1-1 Create a new counter attribute. For creating a new counter attribute, maintain thefollowing data:
Field Name or Data Type Values
Counter attribute Z##_C_ATTR
Description Z##_Counter_Attribute
Unit of measure PC (piece).
Save.
2-1-2 Create a new counter category. For creating a new counter category, make a new
entry and maintain the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Value
Category Z##
Description Z##_Counter_Category
Input Mode Visible Value Save.
2-1-3 Review item categories settings for counters. Look at item category ZSRP to see
what settings have been maintained.
• Display counter
• Display reading
• One tab page
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 62/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-30
Save.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 63/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-31
Solutions
Unit: Installed Base and Individual Objects
Topics:
• Installed Base (IBase)
• Individual Object (IObject)
• Counter
In SAP GUI and PCC UI
1-2 Describe Installed Base (IBase).
1-6-5 Define the term IBase:
An IBase represents a hierarchical component structure or setup of devices,machinery, products, and so on delivered to customer that can also includeintangible objects such as software packages and licenses.
The installed bases at the uppermost level are used to structure the customer or
business partner. The installed base components are found at a lower level.
1-6-6 Scheme of possible IBase component structure.You can mix all component types within one structure in any way.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 64/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-32
1-2 Create Installed Base (IBase) in SAP GUI.
1-2-1 Log on to the CRM Service 4.0 training system with a user name and password
provided by your trainer.
1-2-2 Choose SAP menu → Master Data → Installed Base → Create Installed Base.
(IB51).
1-2-3 Select:
Field Name or Data Type Values
IBase Category 01 (Installed Base)
Select Enter .
1-2-4 IBase data:
Field Name or Data Type Values
Ext. ID ##
Description IBase_Megastore##
Click Enter.
1-2-5 Choose Goto → Partner in the menu bar.
Partner Assignment pop-up:
Field Name or Data Type Values
Function Sold-to Party
Partner ##Megastore
Main PartnerClick Transfer .
1-2-6 Choose Goto → Address in the menu bar. Enter required data in Address Maintenance
pop-up.Select Copy.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 65/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-33
1-2-7 Enter the direct subordinate objects.
1) Product tab:
Field Name or Data Type Values
Product ID IT1006(Laserprinter Print-it now)
Quantity 1
Product ID IT1000
(PC Maxitech 1.200
Professional)
Quantity 1
Product ID IT1104
(Colordrop Ink Cartridges)
Quantity 1
Enter .
2) Enter a text item under the IT1006. Mark the product IT1006 (LaserprinterPrint-it now) in the structure-tree.
Text tab:
Field Name or Data Type Values
Description Enter text: e.g. Color printer
Enter .
3) Product versus IObject:Definition Product: A product contains information on the features of goods or
services (For example, size of RAM of a computer).Definition IObject:
An individual object provides specific data, valid for only one, uniquely identified,
single object (e.g. IP address of a computer).
1-2-8 Save your first IBase. Note the internal IBase number:
_______________________________________________________________
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 66/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-34
OPTIONAL:
1-2-9 Create a second IBase in the same way then you did the first.
1-2-10 Save your second IBase. Note the internal IBase number:
_______________________________________________________________
1-2-11 Assign your second IBase as a component to your first IBase.
Choose SAP menu→ Master Data→ Installed Base→ Change Installed Base.(IB52). Choose Enter .
Open your first IBase:
Field Name or Data Type Values
Installed Base Internal number of your firstIBase
Choose Enter .
Field Name or Data Type Values
Installed Base Internal number of your
second IBase
1-2-12 Save.
1-3 Change Installed Base (IBase).
1-3-1 Replace the product IT1000 with the product IT1005.
Choose SAP menu→ Master Data→ Installed Base→ Change Installed Base.
(IB52).
Select Enter .Open your first IBase:
Field Name or Data Type Values
Installed Base Internal number of your firstIBase
Select Enter .Mark the product IT1000 (PC Maxitech 1.200 Professional) in the structure tree.
Select Cut in the context menu.
Choose IBase_Megastore## in the structure tree Products tab:
Field Name or Data Type Values
Description IT1005
(Flatscreen Cormoran 17")
Quantity 1
Save.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 67/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-35
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 68/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-36
OPTIONAL:
1-4 Display Installed Base (IBase).
1-4-1 SAP menu→ Master Data → Installed Base → Display Installed Base (IB53).
Field Name or Data Type Values Installed Base Number of your first IBase
Valid-on time 10 minutes before
Select Enter .
1-5 Change two Installed Bases (IBases).
1-5-1 SAP menu→ Master Data → Installed Base → Change Two Installed Bases.
(IB54).
Field Name or Data Type Values
IBase(left) Number of your first IBase
IBase (right) Number of your second IBase
Select Enter .
Drag one component from the left to the right side.
Save.
1-6 Installed Bases in PC UI.
1-6-1 Logon to the portal with a user name and password provided by your trainer.
1-6.1 Choose Products & Installations→ Installations.1-6.2 Fast Search:
Field Name or Data Type Values
IBase Number of your first IBase
1-6.3 Mark your IBase in the result list.
Double click. Browse through the different tabs and have a look at the data.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 69/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-37
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 70/494
© SAP AG CR700 2-38
Unit: Installed Base and Individual Object
Topics: Customizing of Counter
2-2 Customize counter settings.
2-2-1 IMG path:
CRM→ Master Data → Counter → Maintain Counter Attributes.Select New Entries.
Field Name or Data Type Values
Counter Attribute Z##_C_ATTR
Description Z##_Counter_Attribute
Unit of measure PC (pieces)
Save.
2-2-2 IMG path:
CRM→ Master Data → Counter → Maintain Counter Categories.
Select New Entries.
Field Name or Data Type Values
Category Z##
Description Z##_Counter_Category
Input Mode Visible Value
Save.
2-2-3 Review item categories settings for counters. Look at item category ZSRP to see
what settings have been maintained.
IMG path:
Choose CRM→ Transactions → Basic Settings → Define Item Categories.
Choose SRV1.
In Dialog Structure on left side of screen, choose Assignment of Business
Transaction Categories.
Choose Service Process.
Double click on Customizing Item in dialog structure.
View the settings for Display Counter, Display Reading and One tab page.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 71/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-1
SAP AG 2004
Service Contract & Entitlement
6. Complaints and Returns
7. In-House Repair
8. Enterprise Intelligence
9. E-Service
10. Service Analytics
Appendix
1. Overview of CRM Service
2. Installed Base; Individual
Object
3. Service Contract & Entitlement
4. Planned Services
5. Service Order Management
Day 3
Day 1 Day 2
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 72/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 73/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-3
SAP AG 2004
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Identify functions and contents of service contracts
Create service contracts
Bill contracts
Describe the options for Service Level Agreements
Enter a contract with Service Level Agreements
Describe the effects of contracts on service processing
Perform the customizing settings for service contracts and
Service Level Agreements
Service Contract & Entitlement: Unit Objectives
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 74/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-4
SAP AG 2004
At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:
Create service contracts
Bill service contracts
Service Contract & Entitlement: Topic Objectives
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 75/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-5
SAP AG 2004
Service Contract & Entitlement
66
44
22
3311
88
55
Service Contract
Service Contract QuotationProduct & Warranty
Registration
Service Order
Service
Contract
Billing
Service Order
Escalation
Contract &
Warranty
Analysis
77
Service Order
Confirmation& Billing
Product registration of customer assets represented as installed base components and individual objects;multiple warranties can be assigned to registered products
Quotation for service contract Service contract specifying object coverage, parts and services entitlement, service levels and price
agreements Periodic billing of service contract using CRM billing engine, integrated to SAP R/3 financial and cost
accounting Service order processing with integrated validation of service contract and warranty entitlements Monitoring service level compliance of service order and triggering predefined escalation procedures Service order confirmation and billing according to service contract price agreements and warranty
entitlements Service level compliance analysis, Service contract profitability analysis, Warranty analysis
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 76/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-6
SAP AG 2004
Service Contracts
Represent long-term service agreement withcustomers about content and coverage of
services
Specify service levels a customer is entitled to
List the parts that are covered by contracted
services (for example, server, workstations,
printers)
Product list containing services and spare parts
included in contract entitlement
Contain price agreements for services and parts
Limit contracted services or spare parts in terms
of value and/or quantity
What is a Service Contract?
A service contract is a long-term agreement with business partners that specifies which services are beingoffered for that period. The service contract line item lists customer objects – installed base, installed base components, and products – that are covered by the contract line item.
Service level agreements list the level of service a customer is entitled to and contain functions formonitoring compliance with those terms. A contract may include contract-specific price agreements thatcontrol not only what is covered by the contract but also what prices may be charged for any workcovered by that contract.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 77/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 78/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-8
SAP AG 2004
Object list
Object List & Product List
Objects (products, installed bases, or installed base components)
a contracted service is valid for; can be specified in an object list.
Product List
Services and spare parts that are covered by the contracted service;
limits can be set in terms of quantity and value
Each contract line item can specify a list of objects that are covered by the service product on that lineitem.
Installed bases and installed base components can be used as elements of this object list. The object list can also include products. Objects are entered on the Objects tab page at the line item level. You can display existing service contract data for each installed base in Installed Base Management. You can specify services and spare parts that should be covered by the contracted services in the product
list The product list can be specified by product, product category, or product range Items in the product list will automatically be validated against requested service during service and
repair order processing
Value / Quantity Limits: Limits can be set in terms of value and/or quantity for contracted services or spare parts
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 79/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-9
SAP AG 2004
Price agreements for services and parts can be maintained
within a service contract.
They are then applicable for any service process referring to
the service contract.
Header price
agreements
Item price
agreements
Billing
Consideration of
price agreements
Service process with
contract reference
Item 10
Repair service
Price Agreements
Price agreements are contract-specific prices, discounts or deductions. They determine which services are covered wholly, partially, or not at all by the contract. For example, a price agreement can define that all spare parts are free of charge, and that the installation
of spare parts is to be invoiced at the rate of $25 per hour. If you perform service processes with reference to the contract, the system takes these price agreements
into account when billing from the service process. This means that the customer is billed only for those expenses not covered by the contract. Price agreements have no effect on periodic contract billing. The amounts charged for periodic contract
billing result exclusively from the header and item conditions of the contract.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 80/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-10
SAP AG 2004
Contract billing using CRM Billing Engine
Billing requests generated from contract itemsaccording to billing plan
Transferred to billing engine for billing
Document link between service order and
service contract allowing
Billing of service process with reference to service
contracts pricing conditions
Service order cost settlement to service
contract's cost accounting object
Service Contract Billing
Service contract line items have a billing plan, which controls periodic billing. Billing requests are generated from the billing plan according to its customizing, and are transferred to
the billing engine directly. Service processes assigned to service contracts may incur costs that are not entirely covered by the
contract. These services may be billed at a special rate based on conditions in price agreements in thecontract.
When the service order is billed, these conditions will apply automatically.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 81/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-11
SAP AG 2004
SAP CO integration of service contract with SAP R/3
cost accounting object, collecting
Revenues from contract's billing plan
Costs from service orders referring to contract
SAP BW integration of service contract data
Aggregated relevant data on contract header and item level
from mySAP CRM and SAP CO
CRM OnlineCRM Online
SAP BW
Controlling Integration
Service contract revenues can flow to SAP R/3 Controlling. Any costs associated with service orders assigned to a service contract can flow to SAP R/3 as well and
are collected on contract level.
SAP BW can report on service contract data from mySAP CRM and other SAP or non-SAP systems.
The controlling integration is defined in the same way as for service processes. You can choose between
single object and mass controlling. Service process costs are collected in the CO cost object associated
with the contract.
BW provides the following analysis:
Service Contract Analysis
- Identifies contract products with a high net value
- Overview of the value and volume of active service contracts
- Monitors customer satisfaction with services performed under contracts
Service Level Compliance Analysis- Rate of completion on schedule with completion dates determined by service level agreements
- Overview of delayed and on-schedule services
- Monitors the punctuality of services
- Enables quality analysis in service organizations
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 82/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-12
SAP AG 2004
Method 1: Convert Service Contract
Quotation into Service Contract
Quotation item status:
Quotation accepted
Quotation rejected
Order item status:
Quotation accepted
Quotation
Service Quotation
(Contract)
Result 1
1 document
ServiceQuotation
Contract
Item 1
Item 3
Item 2 ConvertConvert
Item 1
Item 2
ServiceQuotation
Contract
Item status
indicates whether the item belongs to:
Quotation (Quotation, Quotation) or
Order (Quotation accepted )
Item 3
Method 2: Create Service Contract
as Follow-up transaction
Service ContractService Quotation
Result 2
2 documents
Contract
Quotation
Item 1
Item 3
Item 2
Quotation item status:
Quotation accepted (1,2)Quotation (3)
Follow-up documentFollow-up documentItem 1
Item 2
Service
Contract
Order item status:
Open (1,2)
Copy Service Contract Quotation items with status Quotation
accepted to Service Contract by using button
Service Contract Quotations
Service Contract Quotations: have a defined validity can contain services, materials, spare parts and expense items have the system statuses “Request for Quotation”, “Quotation”, “Quotation Accepted” and
“Completed” can be copied or converted into a service contract
Method 2: only Service Contract Quotation items with status “Quotation accepted” can be copied into Service
Contract
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 83/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-13
SAP AG 2004
Service Level Agreements: Topic Objectives
At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:
Describe the options for Service Level Agreements
Describe the effect of contracts on service processing
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 84/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-14
SAP AG 2004
Service Level Agreements (1)
Service level of contracted services specified on contract
item level
Determines the delivery of contract based services for ensured
service hours, response time, and so on
Allows escalation procedures to monitor compliance of service
fulfillment with SLA
Controls the pricing of services according to
chosen service level
Controls processing of service processes
referring to the contract,
for example, service due dates
Influences pricing of service contract and
service processes referring to the contract
Service level agreements are a subset of contracts where the customer is assured the performance ofcertain services within a predefined period of time.
For example, if a problem occurs on a customer’s machines, the customer is assured that a technician will be on site to repair the fault within a specified amount of time.
Contract pricing can be determined based on the response time desired for the contract line item. Service process deadlines can be influenced by contract line item. Service profiles and response profiles are assigned to the service product master. When the service product is added to the line item, the profiles are copied into the contract item. The service profile and response profile can be viewed on the Service Data tab. This profile is a default. You may choose another profile for the contract line item. Contract pricing can be based on the profiles (a standard price on the product level, an extra charge
depending on profile chosen). This is done via the condition technique of pricing.
In standard customizing, condition 1305 is delivered for extra charge depending on service window and1306 for extra charge depending on response profile. You can view this on the Condition Detail tab.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 85/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-15
SAP AG 2004
Standard SLA parameters delivered by SAP,
allowing to specify time frame of service availability
ensured first reaction time
ensured call closure time
According to the Service window and esponse
time profile fields provided by SAP within
service product master
service contract item
Service Level Agreements (2)
Response time: How long it will take to respond to the customer need – call back within specified time,technician on site within a specified time
Service window or Availability time: Working hours of the Service or Support Center Downtime: Maximum number of breakdowns per year Availability: Percentage of assured system availability Solution time: Maximum period of time allowed for the solution of a problem. The SLA parameters Response Profile and Service Profile are standard delivered. You can create additional parameters using customer-specific set types. Processing of the data from the
set type occurs using Business Add-Ins (BAdIs).
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 86/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-16
SAP AG 2004
Monday Tuesday
Service profile
8am -12pm / 1pm - 5pm
Response profile
8 hours
4 hours
2 hours
7am - 7pm
8 hours
4 hours
2 hours
8am 12pm 6pm 8am 12pm 6pm time
Notification received
Availability Time and Response Time Example
In this example, the response times determined are displayed for a call received on Monday at 12 p.m. Service profile: 8a.m. - 12p.m. / 1p.m. - 5p.m. Response time - 8 hours: response by Tuesday 12 p.m. Response time - 4 hours: response by Monday 5 p.m.
Response time - 2 hours: response by Monday 3 p.m. Service profile: 7a.m. - 7 p.m. Response time - 8 hours: response by Tuesday 8 a.m. Response time - 4 hours: response by Monday 4 p.m. Response time - 2 hours: response by Monday 2 p.m.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 87/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-17
SAP AG 2004
Service Level Agreements - Enhancements
Two options to enhance SLA function by customer
specific parameters, for example, system availability
level and number of downtimes, using either
1. Service product configuration to specify
service level of contracted item incl. pricing
determination
2. Field extension provided for contract item
to specify service level from customer fields
Enhancement of service level agreement parameters according to customer needs (1): Use of configurable service products with customer-specific SLA parameter fields SLA configuration values specified on service contract item level Pricing determination from variant conditions of service product
SLA dependent service processing ruled via customer exit No system modification
Enhancement of service level agreement parameters according to customer needs (2): Use of customer-specific field extension provided for service contract item Customer's SLA values from service products (without configuration)
Pricing determination using customer-specific append to communication structure SLA dependent service processing ruled using customer exit Screen sequence control modification to integrate customer sub screen into contract item
Example of monitoring a service level agreement: An escalation for a missed deadline could occur as follows:
The responsible processor is informed when the service process is still not in process after 2 hours. The department manager is informed when the service process is still not in process after 3 hours. The customer service manager is informed when the service process is still not in process after the time
in the service window has run out.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 88/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-18
SAP AG 2004
Service Contract Structure
I t e m D
a t a
Service Item
SLA
• Business Partner
• Sales / Service
Organization
• Validity Dates
• Ibase
• Item Status
“Released” H e a d e r D a t a
Price
Agreements
Service Item
SLA
• Business Partner
• Sales / Service
Organization
• Start Required Date
• Ibase
Price
Agreements
Copy
Copy
Copy
Determination criteria
=
=
=
Service Contract Service Process
=
According to the settings in Customizing, when creating a service process with a transaction type forwhich contract determination is activated, either you are requested to select a contract, or the system
determines the contract, and copies it automatically to the transaction. Contract determination occurs in
the system based on the following selection criteria:
Partner: The sold-to party in the service contract and in the service process must be identical.
Sales and Service Organization: The sales organization and the distribution channel must be identical.
If the service organization is processed in the service contract, it must be identical to the one in the
service process.
Status: The status of the service contract item must be Released.
Validity: The date in the Start Required by Customer field in the service process must lie within the
validity period of the service contract item.
Object List: The reference object from the service process must be entered in the object list for the
service contract item. Copying Control: The copying of contract items to transaction items must be set in Customizing.
Service contract information is readily visible from any service process assigned to a service contract
Services and spare parts available with a selected contract are proposed to copying to a service order. A
release order list shows history of service orders relating to value/quantity service contract items.
Service delivery dates are calculated based on SLA of selected service contracts.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 89/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-19
SAP AG 2004
At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:
Describe the features of warranties
Describe the effect of warranties on service processing
Warranties: Topic Objectives
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 90/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-20
SAP AG 2004
Warranty - Definition
A warranty is a promise made to the customer
Guaranteeing that a product is without defects
With a validity for a specific period
defining entitlements for repair or exchange of defect
parts
Wholly or in part without charge
Warranties will be created in product master data maintenance using the product type Warranty. Following information can be entered for a warranty: Warranty Category (Customer / Vendor warranty) Warranty Basis (Time / Counter / Time-/Counter dependent)
Warranty Period Accounting Indicator (criterion according to which you can differentiate between billable, non-billable,
and partially billable products for pricing and controlling purposes) Warranty Catalog (for including/excluding catalogs, code groups or codes) Warranty Services (for including/excluding products, product groups, item categories or item object
types) Warranty Counter Data (for specifying the counter readings up to which the warranty is valid)
This data is validated in the service transactions during the warranty check against the item data in the
transaction.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 91/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-21
SAP AG 2004
IBase
Component
IBase
Component
Installation
Relationship
Installation
Relationship
Warranty
Master
Warranty
Master
e.g. Individual
Object
Attributes:
Start date
Rule start
End date
Rule end
Warranty category
(customer)
Warranty Basis
(time, counter,
time and/or counter)
Period
(validity)
Subjects
(including, excluding)
Services
(including, excluding)
Rule Start
(e.g. Iobject
installation date)
Rule End
(e.g. start date + runtime)
Warranty category
(customer)
Warranty Basis
(time, counter,
time and/or counter)
Period
(validity)
Subjects
(including, excluding)
Services
(including, excluding)
Rule Start
(e.g. Iobject
installation date)
Rule End
(e.g. start date + runtime)
Product Master Product Master
Warranties - Assignment
Relationships
Assignment and tracking of warranties Product master
Warranty information for Individual Objects created with reference to product, for example, productregistration using e-Service
Warranty information for non-individualized customer products, for example, complaint processing forconsumer products
Individual Object
Assigned automatically when referencing a product master Date attributes of Individual Object such as delivery date, installation date, can be used for start date
determination Installed Base component
Rule based or manual maintenance of warranty start date
Allows multiple assignment of warranties
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 92/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-22
SAP AG 2004
Service Process – Warranty Validation
Automatic check in Service Order, Repair Order and
Complaint
Check for coverage of product that is subject of service including
scope of entitlement (e.g. free parts and labor)
Repeated warranty validation when relevant data has changed,
e.g. damage code after inspection
Relevant warranty data displayed and stored in document
Warranty Pricing and Billing Integration
Immediate determination of influence on pricing and billing
Accounting indicator copied as default from warranty
Pricing conditions based on accounting indicator
Rule-based Warranty Cost Assignment
Immediate determination of influence on cost settlement
According to the settings in Customizing, when creating a service process with a transaction type forwhich warranty determination is activated, the system determines the warranty and copies itautomatically to the transaction. Contract determination occurs in the system based on the Installed BaseComponent.
Relevant warranty information is visible from any service process a warranty is assigned to. Full control of warranty expenses through rule-based warranty cost assignment Warranty Analysis Provides information about the amount of products with or without warranty Monitors expired warranties per Installed Base and Individual Object
Warranty expense analysis
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 93/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-23
SAP AG 2004
Service Contract & Warranty Customizing: TopicObjectives
At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:
Perform the customizing settings for service contracts
Perform the customizing settings for warranty management
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 94/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-24
SAP AG 2004
Transaction Type
Item Category
Date Management
Pricing Conditions
Actions
Cancellation
Service Contract & Warranty Customizing
Certain functions are prerequisites for working with all contract types. Before you create a contract in theonline application, you make the following Customizing settings in the IMG for CRM: Date management: You must define the date profiles for key dates in a contract, for example, start and
end date for sales and service contracts, and interim period for lease contracts.
Actions: This is an optional function. You can customize the system to automatically plan and triggerspecific follow-up actions, such as a follow-on document.
Pricing conditions: You determine the conditions that can be used for price agreements in contracts. Cancellation: You can use the cancellation procedure to define and evaluate the various reasons for
canceling a contract.
The first three settings are available under CRM → Basic Functions.
The last setting is available in the IMG under CRM→ Transactions → Settings for Contracts.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 95/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-25
SAP AG 2004
Define transaction type:
Transaction attributes and characteristics:
Controlling attributes
Leading business transaction category
Assign business transaction categories:
Additional business transaction categories
Dependent of leading business transaction category
Customizing at header level:
Different settings according
to business transaction category
Service Contract Customizing - Header
Standard delivered contract type: SC (service contract) & SCC (service contract (Value/Quantity) The quantity/value service contracts has the entry C (=Service: Target Value and Quantity) in the
Quantity/Value Contract field in the details of the service contract If the standard transaction types are not adequate for the representation of your business processes, you
can define your own transaction types in Customizing under Customer Relationship Management →
Transactions→ Basic Settings → Define Transaction Types. For each transaction type, you can definethe different attributes that are required for a business process.
Attached to transaction type:
Text determination procedure Partner determination procedure Status profile Number range
Increment item number and increment sub-item number Organizational data profile Early number assignment
Each transaction type is assigned to a business transaction category. Service contract is a businesstransaction category of its own.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 96/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-26
SAP AG 2004
Define item category:
Item attributes and characteristics:
Controlling attributes
Item object type
Assign business transaction categories:
Assign business transaction categories
Only certain combinations are permitted
Customizing at item level:
Different settings according to business
transaction category
Service Contract Customizing - Item
First you define the general settings that are the same attributes for all types of item categories. General data: Item object type Profiles
- Text determination procedure- Partner determination procedure- Status profile- Orgdata profile for partner processing- Date profile- Action profile- Condition group- Configuration data
In the second step, you define the business context for which the item category is used. The available
settings differ depending on the assigned business transaction category. The business transactioncategory Sales contains billing data, pricing data and completion rule (here you can define whether itshould be possible to exceed the quantity/value or not).
The standard item category used for service contracts is ‘SCN (SAP Standard Service Contract Item)’. If the standard item category does not fulfill your requirements, you can define your own item categories
in Customizing under Customer Relationship Management → Transactions → Basic Settings → Define
Item Categories.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 97/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-27
SAP AG 2004
Date Profiles consist of:
Date rules
Date types
Durations
Reference Object
Date Profiles consist of:
Date rules
Date types
Durations
Reference Object
Important dates used in contracts:
Validity Dates: Start and End of Contract
Cancellation Dates
Billing Plan Dates
Date Management Configuration
Because a key component of the contract is an agreement for a certain length of time with customers,dates are crucial to contract configuration.
Dates are controlled within the contract by a date profile. The date profile is assigned to the transactiontype and the item category.
Date profiles contain date rules, date types, durations and reference objects allowed. Date rules determine a date, for example, quarterly, first of the month, start date plus validity, today’s
date. Date types are the types of dates we find as various fields in the contract, for example, contact start date,
end date, acceptance date, cancellation date, or dates to or from on a billing plan. Duration gives us periods such as the validity period of a contract. A reference object is where the system draws the date from, such as from the database or from a
customer.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 98/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-28
SAP AG 2004
Transaction
Type
Transaction
Type
Cancellation
Rule 1
Cancellation
Rule 1
Cancellation
Procedure
Cancellation
Procedure
Cancellation
Rule 2
Cancellation
Rule 2
Service Contracts: Cancellation
Cancellation: You define a cancellation procedure that brings together configuration from cancellationrules and optionally, a cancellation party.
Cancellation rules specify dates during which the cancellation can take place. Cancellation procedures must have at least one rule, but may have more. Cancellation procedures may
specify a party, but then can be invoked only when that party is the canceling party. If you leave the field blank, all canceling parties can use this rule.
Standard procedure 0001 comes shipped. It contains the two cancellation rules, 0001 and 0002. Cancellation rule 0001 – allows cancellation immediately up to two weeks after contract start date Cancellation rule 0002 – allows cancellation with a notice period of up to 3 months at end of year
Cancellation reasons are a list of reasons you enter that are to be used in the contract to indicate why a party is canceling. These can be very useful for analysis at a later point.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 99/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-29
SAP AG 2004
Contract Customizing - Price Agreements
Price agreements are contract-specific
conditions which affect work done in
service processes assigned to thecontract.
Allowed condition types are assigned to
a group.
The group is assigned to item categories
and transaction types for contracts.
These same condition types must be
used in the pricing procedure of the
service process for the price agreements
to automatically apply.
Contractual price agreements take effect with billing from a service process with a contract reference. The price agreements are considered if they belong to the contract header or contract line item to which
the service process was assigned. The same condition types used in the contract must be assigned to the pricing procedure for the service
process.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 100/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-30
SAP AG 2004
Customizing SLA Escalation Management
Make settings in
Escalation Management
to control whichprocesses are triggered
when deadlines are
missed
Assign the date profile to
the item category
Assign the action profile
to the item category
The system can monitor when dates that are defined in the SLA parameters are exceeded. This is done bymaking settings in Escalation Management. You can use Escalation Management to determine anydeadline you want to monitor and which subsequent processes you want to trigger when a date for thisdeadline is exceeded.
Assign the date profile SLA Data at Item Level to your service process item category in the activity Assign Date Profile to Item Category and do the same thing for the action profile Monitoring SLA
Deadlines in the activity Assign Action Profile to the Item Category. Set up the selection report for performing the actions (transaction SPPFP ) according to your requirements.
You can also enhance the action profile using your own action definitions. If you want to use your ownSmart Form as an output medium, enter the name of the Smart Form in Action Processing and define theschedule and start conditions for definition of the action.
Example
You use the SLA parameter First Response Time. The first response time is exceeded in a service process. An e-mail is generated and sent automatically to remind the employee responsible about this process and provide him or her with the most important transaction data.
As an enhancement to this escalation, a second e-mail can be sent to the same person or to a different person after an additional period of time has expired.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 101/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 102/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-32
- To use them in the product master, you have to use the set type Warranty.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 103/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-33
SAP AG 2004
You are now able to:
Identify functions and contents of service contracts &warranties
Create service contracts & warranties
Bill contracts
Describe the options for Service Level Agreements
Enter a contract with Service Level Agreements
Describe the effects of contracts on service processing
Perform the customizing settings for service contracts,
SLA & warranties
Service Contract & Entitlement: Unit Summary
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 104/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 105/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-35
1-1-5 Create a price agreement for the product R-1160 on item level.
Field Name or Data Type Description
Condition Type 0PAR (Item Discount Contract – SAP00090)
Amount 10
1-1-6 Release the items (expand the toolbar on the header level) and save the servicecontract.
Your service contract number: __________
2-1 Create a new service order. Check whether your newly created service contract will be
determined and can be assigned to the service order.2-1-1 Create a service order with transaction type Service Process using the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Sold-to Party ##Megastore
Description Harddisk problems ##
Product R-1160 (Quantity 1)
2-1-2 Assign the service contract you have created in the previous exercise.
2-1-3 Check the Prices on item level:
Has the discount from the service contract been copied? _______________
2-1-4 Check the contract assignment on item level.
2-1-5 Release the items and save your service order.
Your service order number:
__________
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 106/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-36
Unit: Service Contracts & Entitlements
Topic: Billing of the Service Contract
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Bill the service contract
• Check the creation of an internal order
• Post the revenues to CO
Your long-term agreements (contracts) with your customers will be billed on periodically basis (for example, monthly).
You can use CRM billing to create invoices.
1-1 Perform an individual billing of the previously created service contract.
1-1-1 Go to Maintain Billing Due List and enter the number of your service contract, then press F8 (Edit).
1-1-2 Select the row with the actual month and perform an individual billing for this item.
1-1-3 Save.
1-1-3 Search for your billing document.
1-2 Check the creation of the internal order in R/3. Search for your internal order:
1-2-1 Use F4 search Internal Order created from CRM Service.
1-2-2 Enter the transaction number of your service contract in the Business Transaction field and check the Master Data.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 107/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 108/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-38
Exercises
Unit: Service Contract & Entitlements
Topic: Warranty
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Identify warranties within the processing of business transactions inService
• Specify the effect of warranties on pricing and billing
A warranty is a promise made to the customer
- guaranteeing that a product is without defects
- with a validity for a specific period- defining entitlements for repair or exchange of defect parts- wholly or in part without charge
1-1 Assign a warranty to a component of your installed base.
1-1-1 Open the installation for your BP ##Megastore.
1-1-2 Assign the following warranty to the IBase component:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Warranty WP_001
1-1-3 Save your changes.
1-2 Create a new service order and check whether the warranty you just examined will bedetermined in the document.
1-2-1 Create a service order with transaction type Service Process using the followingdata:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Sold-to Party ##Megastore
Description Notebook warranty ##
1-2-2 Enter a Spare Part Product:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Product R-1130
Please select No assignment when the pop-up appears!
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 109/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-39
1-2-3 Assign the installed base component for your business partner ##Megastore asReference Object on item level:
1-2-4 The system displays a message that valid warranties were found. Check theWarranties tab on item level:
Which warranty was found? ______________
Which accounting indicator was found? ______________What is the impact of the accounting indicator on the prices?
_______________________________________________
1-2-5 Release the items and save your service order.
Your service order number: __________
1-3 Create a confirmation for your service order.
1-3-1 Create a confirmation as a follow-up transaction for your service order.
1-3-2 Copy all items into the confirmation.
1-3-3 Check whether the warranty data has been copied into the service confirmation.
Is it the same warranty as in the service order? __________________
1-3-4 Check the prices.
Does the accounting indicator impact the prices? How?
________________________________________
1-3-5 Complete items and save your confirmation.
Your confirmation number: _____________
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 110/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-40
Solutions
Unit: Service Contract & Entitlements
Topic: Service Contract
1-3 Create a new service contract.
1-3-1 Log on to the Portal with the user name and password provided by your trainer.
Go to Field Service→ Contracts and create a service contract with transaction typeService Contract
Choose Create.
In the pop-up, choose Service Contract .
Field Name or Data Entry Description
Sold-to Party ##Megastore
Description Contract ##
Choose Add Entry
Field Name or Data Entry Description
Product SER_021
Quantity 1
To confirm the entries, choose Enter .
1-3-2 Assign your previously created installed base on item level.
Choose the Installed Base tab
Select Add Entry and enter the number of your IBase.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 111/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-41
1-3-3 Maintain the following products in the product list:
Choose Product list tab
Choose Add Entry
Field Name or Data Type Description
Product 1 SRV1_4
Product 2 R-1130
Product 2 R-1160
1-3-4 Create a price agreement for the product R-1160 on item level.
Choose Price Agreement tab
Choose Add Entry
Field Name or Data Type Description
Condition Type Item Discount Contract –SAP00090
Product ID r-1160
Amount 10
Enter
1-1-5 Release the item and save the service contract.
Choose Status tab (on item level)
Select Add Entry and select the status Released in the drop down box.
Save
Your service contract number: __________
2-1 Go to Service & Support→ Orders and create a new service order. Check whether
your newly created service contract will be determined and can be assigned to theservice order.
2-1-1 Create a service order with transaction type Service Process.
Choose Create
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 112/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 113/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-43
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 114/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-44
Solutions
Unit: Service Contract & Entitlements
Topic: Billing of the service contract
1-1 Go to IDES→ Billing and perform an individual billing of the previously created servicecontract.
1-1-4 Go to Maintain Billing Due List and enter the number of your service contract, thenchoose F8 (Edit).
Choose CRM Billing as Billing Engine Application:
Enter your service contract number in the selection screen, then choose F8:
1-1-5 Select the row with the actual month and perform an individual billing for this item.
1-1-6 Save.
1-1-4 Go to Field Service→ Billing and search for your billing document.
Choose Open Advanced Search and enter your business partner number in the Payer field.
Choose the Search result to display the details.
1-2 Go to R/3 Integration→ Display Internal Order and check the creation of the internalorder in R/3.
Search for your internal order:
1-2-1 Use F4 search Internal Order created from CRM Service.
1-2-1 Enter the service contract number in the Business Transaction field and perform thesearch.
Check the Master Data.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 115/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 116/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 117/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-47
1-3 Create a new service order and check whether the warranty you just examined will bedetermined in the document.
1-3-1 Create a service order with transaction type Service Process using the followingdata:
Sales & Support→
Orders Choose Create
Choose Service Process in the pop up menu
Enter the following information:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Sold-to Party ##Megastore
Description Notebook warranty ##
1-3-2 Enter a line item for a Spare Part Product
Products tab
Select Spare Parts from the drop-down box.
Choose Add Entry.
Field Name or Data Type Description
Product R-1130
Quantity 1
Choose Enter :
Select No Assignment in the pop-up of the service contract assignment:
1-2-3 Assign your installed base component as Reference Object on item level:
Reference Object tab (item level)
Choose Add Entry
Search for component by installation data for the installed base component with thewarranty assigned.
Field Name or Data Type Description
Search Component
By Installation Data
Ext ID *##* (search for yourgroup number withasterisks)
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 118/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-48
Choose the component with the identification A010036.
Enter
1-2-4 The system displays a message that valid warranties were found. Check theWarranties tab on item level:
Warranty tab
Which warranty was found?
WP_001
Which accounting indicator was found?
Goodwill
What is the impact of the accounting indicator on the prices?
Prices tab
See condition type 2308 with 100% discount.
1-2-5 Save your service order.
Your service order number: _____________
1-3 Create a confirmation for your service order.
1-3-1 Create a confirmation as a follow-up transaction for your service order (expand the
toolbar on header level).Choose Expand
Choose Create Confirmation
Choose Confirmation in the pop-up box.
1-3-2 Copy all items into the confirmation.
Choose Copy All .
After you selected the Copy All button, the green light in the Transfer column turns
into a checkmark.
1-3-3 Check whether the warranty data has been copied into the service confirmation.
Go to the Products tab.
Choose the Warranties tab (on the item level).
Is it the same warranty as in the service order? Yes.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 119/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-49
1-3-4 Check the prices.
Prices tab
Does the accounting indicator impact the prices? How?
The accounting indicator is found by the access sequence of the condition typeZ308.
1-3-5 Complete items and save your confirmation.
Choose Expand .
Choose Complete Items in the expanded menu.
Save.
Your confirmation number:
_____________
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 120/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-50
Solutions
Unit: Service Contract & Entitlements
Topic: Service Contract
1-1 Create a new service contract.
1-1-1 Log on to the SAP GUI with the user name and password provided by your trainer.
SAP Menu→ Service→ Service Contracts and Service Plans→ Maintain Service
Contracts. and create a service contract with transaction type Service Contract
From menu at top: Business Transaction→ Create
Choose Service Contract Enter the following information:.
Field Name or Data Entry Description
Sold-to Party ##Megastore
Ext Reference Contract ##
Add a line item:
Field Name or Data Entry Description
Product SER_021
Quantity 1
To confirm the entries, choose Enter .
1-1-2 Assign your previously created installed base on item level.
Double click on the line item or use the Expand Data Areas button.
Choose the Object list tab
Field Name or Data Entry Description
Installed Base Your installed base
1-1-3 Maintain the following products in the product list:
Choose Product list tab
Field Name or Data Type Description
Product 1 SRV1_4
Product 2 R-1130
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 121/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-51
Product 2 R-1160
1-1-4 Create a price agreement for the product R-1160 on item level.
Choose Price Agreement tab
Field Name or Data Type Description
Condition Type 0PAR (Item DiscountContract – SAP00090)
Product ID r-1160
Amount 10
Enter
1-1-5 Release the item and save the service contract.Choose Status tab (on item level)
Select Set Status and select the status Released in the drop down box.
Save
Your service contract number: __________
2-1 Create a new service order. Check whether your newly created service contract will bedetermined and can be assigned to the service order.
SAP Menu → Service→ Maintain Service Process
2-1-1 Create a service order with transaction type Service Process.
From menu at top, choose Business Transaction →Create
Choose Service Process:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Sold-to Party ##Megastore
Description Hard drive problems ##
Product R-1160
Quantity 1
2-1-2 Assign the service contract you have created in the exercise before.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 122/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-52
After choosing Enter to confirm the product ID, a pop-up appears. Select thecontract and choose Contract Assignment
2-1-3 Check the Prices on item level.
Choose Item Details
Conditions tab
Has the discount from the service contract been copied?
Yes, the discount has been copied.
2-1-4 Check the contract assignment on item level.
Contract data tab
View the contracts information.
2-1-5 Save your service order.
Save
Your service order number: __________
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 123/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-53
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 124/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-54
Solutions
Unit: Service Contract & Entitlements
Topic: Billing of the service contract
1-1 Perform an individual billing of the previously created service contract.
SAP menu→ Service→ Billing→ Maintain Billing Due List
1-1-1 Enter the number of your service contract, then choose F8 (Edit).
1-1-2 Select the row with the actual month and perform an individual billing for this item.
Choose the row for this month.
Choose Individual Billing.
1-1-3 Save.
The line that has been billed will be marked with a green dot.
1-1-4 View the billing document.
SAP menu→ Service→ Billing Maintain→ Billing Documents
Enter search criteria
Field Name or Data Type Description
Payer The BP number for##Megastore
Choose Maintain Billing Documents to display the details.
Highlight the row and choose Details .
1-2 Check the creation of the internal order in R/3.
1-2-2 Log into the R/3 system using the user your instructor gives you.
SAP Easy Access Menu→ Accounting→Controlling→ Internal Orders→ Master
Data→Special Functions→Order→ Display
Use F4 in the Order field.
Choose the search help Internal Order created from CRM Service.
1-2-3 Enter the service contract number in the Business Transaction field and chooseStart search.
Choose the line by doubleclicking
Choose Master Data
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 125/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-55
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 126/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-56
Solutions
Unit: Service Contract & Entitlements
Topic: Warranty
1-1 Assign a warranty to your customer’s installed base.
1-1-1 Open up the installed base which has been created for your ##Megastore customerin your CRM system.
SAP Menu→ Master Data→ Installed Base→ Change Installed Base (IB52)
Choose F4 for search help in the Installed Base field.Use the Text = Description search tab
Field Name or Data Type Description
Description ##* (your group numberfollowed by an asterisk)
Enter
Choose the IBase with the description ##Megastore Installation. (This is a pre-existing IBase that you did not create)
Choose Enter to display the IBase.
1-2-4 Assign a warranty to the IBase component.
Choose the Notebook Basic 15 component with the identification A0100036.
Choose Relationships
Warranty tab
Enter the following warranty information:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Warranty WP_001
Enter .
1-2-5 Save
.
1-3 Create a new service order and check whether the warranty you just examined will bedetermined in the document.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 127/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-57
1-3-2 Create a service order with transaction type Service Process using the followingdata:
SAPMenu→Service→ Maintain Service Processes
Choose Business Transaction→ Create
Choose Service Process
Enter the following information:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Sold-to Party ##Megastore
Description Notebook warranty ##
1-3-3 Enter a line item for a Spare Part Product
Field Name or Data Type Description
Product R-1130
Quantity 1
Choose Enter :
Select No Assignment in the pop-up of the service contract assignment:
1-2-3 Assign your installed base component as Reference Object on item level:
Choose Item Details
Objects tab
Search in the component field by choosing F4.Use the Search Component Using Installed Base
Field Name or Data Type Description
Description of IBase *##* (search for yourgroup number withasterisks)
Enter
Choose the component with the identification A010036.
1-2-4 The system displays a message that valid warranties were found. Check theWarranties tab on item level:
Warranty tab
Which warranty was found?
WP_001
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 128/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-58
Which accounting indicator was found?
K1 Goodwill
What is the impact of the accounting indicator on the prices?
Conditions tab
See condition type 2308 with 100% discount.
1-2-5 Save your service order.
Your service order number: _____________
1-3 Create a confirmation for your service order.
1-3-1 Create a confirmation as a follow-up transaction for your service order (expand the
toolbar on header level).Choose Follow up button
Choose Create Service Confirmation→ Confirmation
Choose Confirmation in the pop-up box.
1-3-2 Copy all items into the confirmation.
Choose the line item .
Choose Copy
1-3-3 Check whether the warranty data has been copied into the service confirmation.
Choose the Warranty tab (on the item level).
Is it the same warranty as in the service order? Yes.
1-3-4 Check the prices.
Conditions tab
Does the accounting indicator impact the prices? How?
The accounting indicator is found by the access sequence of the condition typeZ308.
1-3-5 Complete items and save your confirmation.
Choose Fast Entry
Choose Complete..
Save.
Your confirmation number:
_____________
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 129/494
© SAP AG CR700 3-59
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 130/494
© SAP AG CR700 4-1
SAP AG 2004
Planned Services
6. Complaints and Returns
7. In-House Repair
8. Enterprise Intelligence
9. E-Service
10. Service Analytics
Appendix
1. Overview of CRM Service
2. Installed Base; Individual
Object
3. Service Contract & Entitlement
4. Planned Services
5. Service Order Management
Day 3
Day 1 Day 2
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 131/494
© SAP AG CR700 4-2
SAP AG 2004
Service Plan Service Interval
Simulation Forecasting
Planned Services & Forecasting
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 132/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 133/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 134/494
© SAP AG CR700 4-5
SAP AG 2004
Business scenario with which the maintenance of an object is plannedor performed by a service organization according to defined rules.
Examples of rules:
Proactive triggering of quotations for services
Services according to legal requirements,accident prevention regulations or environmental protection
Contractual agreements
Within these rules the following agreements are met:
Which object is covered
What triggers a planned service
Planned Services
Planned Services: Business Scenario
Benefits of the Planned Services scenario: Lead to a reduction of costs and an increase in efficiency through the standardization and effective
planning of (planned) services
Prevent unplanned downtimes through regular maintenance
Enable the efficient planning of resources, for example, personnel and materials
Take account of legal requirements, for example, product liability laws and accident prevention
regulations
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 135/494
© SAP AG CR700 4-6
SAP AG 2004
Register
products forservice
77
44
2233
55
11
66
Create and
optimize
assignment
Define service plan Trigger service order
from service plan
Perform billingof service plan
Perform service
and confirmation
Planned Services
Planned Services & Forecasting
Perform service plan
simulation and
forecasting
The Sales Manager registers products of customer assets and individual objects, service products, serviceintervals and defines service plans.
A service contract is then defined for the customer specifying object coverage, parts and service
entitlement, service plan, service levels and price
Based on time intervals or counter readings service orders or quotations are generated and service
contract and warranty entitlements are checked automatically.
The Resource Planner assigns the service item to one or more technicians, according to the appointment
agreed upon with the customer.
The Field Service Representative performs the service as described in the service plan, confirms working
times and materials used, and documents the inspection results.
The Service Manager performs periodic or individual billing of service plans and contracts using the
CRM billing.
The Service Manager simulates service orders to forecast and evaluate future requirements of qualified personnel, working times, and materials resulting from the service plan.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 136/494
© SAP AG CR700 4-7
SAP AG 2004
Service Plan: Definition (1)
A service plan
Is a functional enhancement and increases the functionality of the
service contract
Generates follow-ups (quotation, service order, activity) at definable
points in time
Uses a service strategy which is stored as master data
Determines when and which service is to be planned, performed or
offered for which object. The rules therefore are defined in the service
interval
Can be set up so that a follow-up transaction is triggered before the
actual service plan is due
Planned Services Individual or periodic scheduling
Intervals can be based on time, counter or both of them
Periodic services can be billed to the customer independently of
the services actually performed.
Follow-up documents are generated using a new action profile on the sub item level1. Temporal Trigger
- Based on time interval (for example, every year)
- Fixed Interval – terminated by confirmation
2. Performance-dependent Trigger
- Based on counter readings (real counter based)
- Fixed counter interval with date forecast
3. Event-dependent Trigger
- Message or reporting of a failure
4. Complex Trigger
- Combination of each of the above ( 1 to 3 )
Service orders are created from a service plan using the PPF (Post Processing Framework)
Three steps are carried out: Create a service order by copying the service plan item
(copy control)
Merge the new service order with additional data
(for example, sub-items from a service order Template,
Reference Objects or Dates)
Update the service plan by calculating the next planned date
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 137/494
© SAP AG CR700 4-8
SAP AG 2004
A service plan contains
Service intervals as information regarding when services are to be performed orother follow-ups are to be created automatically
Technical objects
Descriptions of work to be performed
Scheduling data
Maintainable agreements for services
Service Plan: Definition (2)
WHEN? WHAT? WHERE?Service plan Quotation
Order
Activity
A service uses copy references for services to be performed Describes complex service items
Analyzes template in the case of service order
Is on item level for service interval
Date interpreter
Base tool within CRM
Calculates dates on the basis of rules (service interval)
Modification-free rules be created
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 138/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 139/494
© SAP AG CR700 4-10
SAP AG 2004
New transaction for defining scheduling parameters
Service interval template can be assigned to a service product
(new settype for service products) New transaction type Service Template can be used as a task list for tasks
to be done when service has to be performed
Service Interval Template
Service Product
Car Inspection
Service Interval Template
Car Inspection
Scheduling type: cyclic,once, alternating, fixedvalues
Time and/or counter-based
Service template: task list
Set type
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 140/494
© SAP AG CR700 4-11
SAP AG 2004
Service plans and service intervals enable the planning of
services in advance based on time and/or counter values:
A recurring service should be performed
A service should be performed once or several times on a specified point in time (not
recurring)
A service should be performed based on a counter interval
The planned date is evaluated on estimated counter consumption which is
converted from the system into a duration added to the start date
The planned date is determined by estimated values, available measuring vouchers
continuously adapt the planned date to actual consumption
Scheduling Scenarios
Inspection Inspection
cyclical planning
Time /Counter
unique planning
SmallInspection
BigInspection
SmallInspection
BigInspection
Time /
Counter
Scheduling means in this context: A general rule about the frequency and the parameters of
a planned service
The following scheduling scenarios are provided:
Cyclic
Once
Alternating
Fixed values
All these scenarios can depend on:
Time
Counter
Both of them
- Example “Mobility Service” for cars:Inspection every 15.000 km20% rebate on time and material
Mobility warranty for one year (breakdown service, etc.)- Questions to be answered within Planned Services:
How many inspections will we have to perform next week/month/year?
Do we have enough service technicians available?How about costs and revenues for mobility services?
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 141/494
© SAP AG CR700 4-12
SAP AG 2004
Scheduling
Date rule for planned
date: e.g. with counterinterval
Scheduling via special date rules
New date types in the date profile Dynamic call of the date rule of the actual service interval by
date rule for planned date
Access to the service plan context within a date rule (e.g.counters, reference objects, etc.)
Scheduling enables creation of general rules about the frequency and the parameters of a plannedservice. The following scheduling types are supported for the three service plan types Time Dependent,
Counter Dependent & Time & Counter Dependent:
Cyclical
Once
Alternating
Fixed values
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 142/494
© SAP AG CR700 4-13
SAP AG 2004
Creating Service Order from a Service Plan
Service Contract Service order
Service Order Template
Check light
Check brakes
Check light
Check brakes
Item usage
Service order template items are copied in service
order item as sub itemsPricing of the service order item and sub items caninfluenced from service contract item.
CO Integration by using the service contract item orservice contract header as controlling object.
Car Inspection
Inspection
Service plan item
TÜV
Service order item
Doc flow
Service contract item
shares data with
e.g. price agreements
Sub item
A Serviceplan item is a subitem of the service contract item If a service order template has been assigned to the service interval template of the service plan product,
the items of the service order template are copied in service order item as subitems
Pricing of the service order item and subitems can be influenced by servicecontract item
CO Integration by using the servicecontract item or servicecontract header as controlling object
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 143/494
© SAP AG CR700 4-14
SAP AG 2004
Define item category:
Item attributes and characteristics:
Action Profile
Date Profile
Assign business transaction categories:
Assign business transaction categories
Only certain combinations are permitted
Customizing at item level:
Different settings according to business
transaction category
Time Interval Rule
Counter Interval Rule
Service Contract Customizing: Item
First you define the general settings that are the same attributes for all types of item categories. General data: Item object type
Profiles
- Text determination procedure
- Partner determination procedure
- Status profile
- Orgdata profile for partner processing
- Date profile
- Action profile
- Condition group
- Configuration data
In the second step, you define the business context for which the item category is used. The available
settings differ depending on the assigned business transaction category. The business transactioncategory Sales contains billing data and pricing data.
The standard item category used for Service Plan Products is SPLA.
If the standard item category does not fulfill your requirements, you can define your own item categories
in Customizing under Customer Relationship Management → Transactions → Basic Settings → Define
Item Categories.
The standard Action Profile assigned to the item category SPLA is SERVICEPLAN.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 144/494
© SAP AG CR700 4-15
SAP AG 2004
Service Plan Service Interval
Simulation Forecasting
Planned Services & Forecasting
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 145/494
© SAP AG CR700 4-16
SAP AG 2004
Service Plan Simulation: Goals
Forecast of future services
Forecast service events for a given time period such as Planned dates
Organizational units involved
Resources needed
Pricing information
Give an idea how the next periods could look like
Resource workload:
Demand for a specific resource cumulated within a period
Service workload:
Amount of services to be performed in a certain period
Support mid-term and long-term planning with forecast
Basic Needs Predict future resource workloads based on current service contracts
Determine service event dates based on virtual service orders
Transfer forecast data to SAP Business Information Warehouse
Compare forecast and actual data
Process
Enter parameters for forecast horizon
Select all service contracts with service plan within this horizon
System creates virtual service orders (which are not saved)
to determine resources for each service event date
The user can see a list of dates and service orders as a result containing the desired information
(resources, products, dates,…)
Transfer data to SAP BW (reporting and analysis functionalities)
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 146/494
© SAP AG CR700 4-17
SAP AG 2004
Service Plan and Forecast
soitem 10
soitem 10
soitem 10
timeso next plan date
item 10
Service Plan: only the next planned date
Forecast: series of next planned datesparameters:• forecast horizon: t1 – t2 or • next 2 orders
t1 t2
Order1 Order2
time
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 147/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 148/494
© SAP AG CR700 4-19
SAP AG 2004
You are now able to:
Identify functions and contents of planned services Create service plans, service intervals, and service interval templates
Describe the scheduling scenarios
Forecast planned services in CRM
Planned Services & Forecasting: Unit Summary
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 149/494
© SAP AG CR700 4-20
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 150/494
© SAP AG CR700 4-21
Exercises
Unit: Planned Services
Topic: Planned Services
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Create service plan
• Generate a service order from a service plan
• Simulate service plans
Service plans help you to save costs incurred through unforeseen
downtimes and to increase efficiency, for example, through improved andmore comprehensible planning, and more efficient scheduling of
resources, such as employees or materials.
The scope of the periodic services is described in the service plan and
their due dates calculated and monitored.
The simulation of service plans provides you with a list of future service
orders and enables you to determine the resources (service employees,spare parts) required for each service order, and to calculate the workload
for a predefined period.
Please note that the next steps have to be done in the SAPGUI!
First, you will check the information in the service plan product. The data in the
serviceplan product controls the service interval via the assigned service interval template.The service interval template is a kind of a rule defining the time when a planned service
should be performed (for example, first oil change after 15.000 km, second oil change after
45.000 km).
1-1 View the product SPL_SERVER to see the settings made for this service plan product.
Which Item Category Group is assigned to the product?
________________________
Which Interval Template for the Service Plan is assigned?
________________________
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 151/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 152/494
© SAP AG CR700 4-23
2-1-4 Release the service plan item and check the scheduled actions again.
Is there a scheduled action?
____________________________
What does this action trigger?
____________________________
2-1-5 Execute the action and save your service contract.
2-1-6 Display Follow-Up Service Order.
Go to Document Flow for your service contract and check if a document with thedescription Service Plan Product exists.
Note the number of the service process.
_____________________________
2-2 Open the follow-up Service Order:
Have all the products from the transaction template been copied into the service
order?
________________
Please note that the next steps have to be done in the SAPGUI.
2-3 Simulate your service plan and forecast the next planned maintenance of the server.
SAP Menu→ Service → Service Contracts & Service Plans→ Simulate Service Plans
2-3-1 Choose the variant CR700 from the menu Go to→ Variants→ Get.
2-3-2 On the selection screen, enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Entry Description
Transaction Number <transaction number of your service
contract>Simulation Period next 12 month
2-3-3 Execute (F8).
2-3-4 Select the line with your service contract and choose the Simulation button.
How many service orders have been simulated?
______________
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 153/494
© SAP AG CR700 4-24
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 154/494
© SAP AG CR700 4-25
Solutions
Unit: Planned Services
Topic: Planned Services
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Create service plan
• Generate a service order from a service plan
• Simulate service plans
Service plans help you to save costs incurred through unforeseen
downtimes and to increase efficiency, for example, through improved andmore comprehensible planning, and more efficient scheduling of
resources, such as employees or materials.
The scope of the periodic services is described in the service plan and
their due dates calculated and monitored.
The simulation of service plans provides you with a list of future service
orders and enables you to determine the resources (service employees,spare parts) required for each service order, and to calculate the workload
for a predefined period.
Please note that the next steps have to be done in the SAPGUI
First you will check the information in the service plan product. The data in the
serviceplan product controls the service interval via the assigned service intervaltemplate. The service interval template is a kind of a rule defining the time when a
planned service should be performed (for example, first oil change after 15.000 km,
second oil change after 45.000 km).
1-5 View the product SPL_SERVER to see the settings made for this service plan product.
SAP Menu→ Master Data→ Products→ Maintain Product (COMMPRO1). Searchfor the Service Product SPL_SERVER .
In the Locator on the left hand side, you can search for the product.
Field Name or Data Type Description
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 155/494
© SAP AG CR700 4-26
Product ID SPL_SERVER
Double-click on the result. The details of the product appear on the right hand side.
Go to the Service tab.
Which Item Category Group is assigned to the product?SPLA.
Which Interval Template for the Service Plan is assigned?
IDES_HT_1
This information is found under Service Plan – Interval Template
1-6 Review the assigned Service Interval Template.
SAP Menu→ Service→ Service Contracts & Service Plans→ Maintain Service
Interval Templates (CRMD_SERV_CYCLE) Which Service Plan Type is used?
The service plan type for IDES_HT_1 is Time Based.
Which Scheduling Type is used?
Cyclical. See column Scheduling Type.
1-7 Review the Service Interval of the template:
Highlight the line of the Service Interval Template and select the Service Interval folder:
When will the next Service Order be generated?
Every three months.
Which Transaction Template is assigned?
Transaction Template 200250.
What impact does the assignment of a transaction template have?
The template contains products that will be automatically copied into the generated
service order.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 156/494
© SAP AG CR700 4-27
Please note that the next steps can be performed in the PCUI or SAP GUI.
To perform these steps in the PCUI, please log on to the Enterprise Portal with the
user name provided by the trainer.
1-8 Review the transaction template assigned to your service product.
Go to Products & Installations→ Templates
Search for the Transaction Template 200250.
Which service products are assigned to the service process template?
Enter the number of the transaction template in the Search field and choose Go. Selectthe Search result to display the details of the template:
2-2 Go to Field Service → Contracts and open the Service Contract you have created in the previous exercise.
Enter the service contract number and press Go.
If you don’t remember your service contract number, you can choose Advanced Search to
search by business partner.
2-3-1 Add the product SPL_SERVER (Quantity 1) as a sub item
Products tab
Choose Add Entry
Field Name or Data Type Description
Product SPL_SERVER
Quantity 1
Higher Level Item 100
Enter
What is the item category of the product?
Service plan item.
2-3-2 Check the Service Plan data:
Highlight the line of the service plan product; the details display.
Go to the Service Plan tab and check the data:
Is the data the same as defined in the Service Interval Template?
Yes, every 3 months, the system will create a service order containing the products
specified in the transaction template 200250.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 157/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 158/494
© SAP AG CR700 4-29
Please note that the next steps have to be done in the SAPGUI!
2-3 Simulate your service plan and forecast the next planned maintenance of the server.
SAP Menu→ Service → Service Contracts & Service Plans→ Simulate Service Plans
(CRMD_SERV_FORECAST).
2-3-1 Choose the selection variant CR700 from the menu.
Use the menu path: Go to→ Variants→ Get
Choose CR700.
Enter.
2-3-2 On the selection screen, enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Transaction Number <transaction number of your servicecontract>
Simulation Period next 12 month
Execute (F8).
2-3-3 Select the line with your service contract and select the Simulation button.
How many service orders have been simulated?
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 159/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-1
SAP AG 2004
Service Order Management
6. Complaints and Returns
7. In-House Repair
8. Enterprise Intelligence
9. E-Service
10. Service Analytics
Appendix
1. Overview of CRM Service
2. Installed Base; Individual
Object
3. Service Contract & Entitlement
4. Planned Services
5. Service Order Management
Day 3
Day 1 Day 2
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 160/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 161/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-3
SAP AG 2004
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Describe the contents and functions of the scenario Service Order
Management
List the steps for service order processing
Create a service quotation and service order
Create a service confirmation
Describe the additional functions like amount allocation, contract, and
warranty determination
Describe the content and functions of
the controlling and logistic integration Perform the customizing settings for
service process
Service Order Management: Unit Objectives
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 162/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 163/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-5
SAP AG 2004
Service Order Management: Business Scenario
Make inquiry
777
444
222 333
555
111
888
666
Convert
quotation into
service order
Accept
quotation
Create and
communicate
quotation
Execute
assignment,perform
confirmation
Create and
optimize
assignments
Approve
confirmation,assign costs
Bill customer,
perform analyses
The Customer responds to a marketing campaign and requests a quotation for a number of products andservices.
The Service Representative creates a quotation for the products and services requested and
communicates this to the customer using phone or e-mail.
The Customer accepts the quotation.
The Service Representative converts the quotation into a service order and releases the order.
The Resource Planner assigns any field service tasks to one or more of his Field Service Representatives.
The Field Service Representative performs the service assignment at the customer site and performs
confirmation for the work done, materials used and so on.
The Service Manager checks and approves the confirmation data and decides which costs should be
billed to the customer.
The Service Manager triggers billing of the customer and performs analyses of the complete service
order processing cycle.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 164/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 165/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-7
SAP AG 2004
Service Quotation Management
Create and
communicate
quotationMake inquiry
77
444
222 333
55
111
88
66
Convert
quotation into
service order
Accept
quotation
Execute
assignment,perform
confirmation
Create and
optimize
assignments
Approve
confirmation,assign costs
Bill customer,
perform analyses
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 166/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 167/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-9
SAP AG 2004
Service Quotation: Conversion Methods
Quotation
Quotation
Quotation
Quotation
Order
Copy accepted
quotation items
into a service order
2 Documents!
Using the follow-up function
Open
Open
Order
Quotation
Quotation
Quotation
Order
Accept or reject
quotation items
in the service order
1 Document!
Changing the status of the items
Open
Open
Completed
There are two methods for converting service quotation items to service order items: A transaction type is used that enables a new service order to be created from the quotation using the
follow-up function.
In this case, two documents exist, a quotation and a service order.
A transaction type is used that enables the status of the quotation items to be changed from Quotation
to Quotation accepted.
In this case, one document exists.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 168/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-10
SAP AG 2004
Service Order Management
Create and
communicate
quotationMake inquiry
77
444
22 33
55
11
88
66
Convert
quotation into
service order
Convert
quotation into
service order
Accept
quotation
Execute
assignment,perform
confirmation
Create and
optimize
assignments
Approve
confirmation,assign costs
Bill customer,
perform analyses
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 169/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-11
SAP AG 2004
Service Order Management: Features
Basic Functions
Header and Item Data
Item Hierarchy
Status Management
Reference Objects
Product Proposal
Damage/Cause Codes
Contract Determination
Warranty Check Credit Limit Check
Counter Integration
Qualification Integration
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 170/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-12
SAP AG 2004
Header and Item Data
Header Data
Information that is valid for the service order as a whole
(For example, Service order number, status, description, priority, Sold-
to Party, ...)
Item Data
Information that is valid for specific service order items only
(For example, service item number, status, description, quantity, unit
of measure, counter reading, subject codes, ...)
The service order is a document that can contain:
Services product items
Spare part items
Sales product items
Expense items
As with all other CRM documents, the service process consists of header and item data. The service
process functions are controlled by the transaction type.
You can find the priority and the category only on header level.
Objects can be IBase components or products. The subjects - damage, location, cause and task codes -
can be selected from catalogs.
Actions can be used for output determination and for escalation management.
Items describe the services that should be performed.
The item data depend on the type of service process item. The resource planning assignment appears
only for service product items, the schedule lines only for sales product items. Contract data appears
only when the item has been assigned to a service contract.
You can postprocess service processes in the CRM System at any time if you need to complete or
change data.
You can also save incorrect or incomplete transactions in the CRM System where they will be
available for postprocessing in the service process list.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 171/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-13
SAP AG 2004
A service product item describes the service
that is to be performed. A service product item includes information
about the planned duration and conditions.
By using the product proposal, the user can
select a service product from a list of services
offered for the product.
A service item can be assigned to an existing
service contract.
Installed Base components and products can
be assigned to a service item in the object list.
Service Product Item
Service processing is triggered by an item that contains a service product (no text items). The service product item describes a service. The item is used to document customer wishes (for example, with
reference to dates) and contains planning-relevant data.
Planning-relevant data includes the service group that is responsible for the performance of a service,
dates, the number of persons necessary for the execution of a service, the estimated duration, quantity
and, if required, the Relevant for resource planning indicator. The sales data must always be maintained
in the service product master.
You can display a product proposal for a reference object (product of the type Material ). The product
proposal contains service products that are possible in connection with this reference object using the
product relationship type Service for . You can transfer the service products to the service process items
by selecting them. The product proposal is used as an entry aid.
The service is confirmed by creating a service confirmation as a follow-up document.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 172/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-14
SAP AG 2004
A spare part item is a product with type Material .
A spare part item is used to plan, control, anddocument the required spare part components.
The spare part item informs the technician which
spare part is required for the service process.
The technician’s stock is represented by a
Technician consignment stock in SAP R/3.
Customer consignment stock in SAP R/3
Storage Location in SAP R/3
A spare part item can be assigned to a servicecontract.
Spare Part Item
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 173/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-15
SAP AG 2004
Within a service process, a sales product item is
used to sell a required spare part. The sales product item informs the technician
which spare part is required for the service
process and delivered separately to the customer.
Within a service process, an Available-to-Promise
check can be performed for each sales product
item (SAP APO integration).
Sales Product Item
A sales product item creates A demand in the Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO).
A sales order item in R/3. The corresponding sales order should be created with the same order
number as the CRM service process. You can create a delivery in R/3 for the sales order.
When creating a delivery, the system
Performs an Available-to-Promise check
Performs a demand settlement
Creates delivery demands in the APO system
Updates the CRM document (delivery number and quantity)
The goods issue deletes the delivery demand and updates the CRM document.
The billing document can be created based on the service process data or the delivery data (based on
sales item quantity or delivered quantity).
Prerequisites: Order type and item category are set up in R/3.
Business partner and products of the type material exist also in R/3.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 174/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-16
SAP AG 2004
Expense Item
Each expense item documents an additional
invoice that is paid by the service representative,e.g. hotel receipt.
Each expense item updates the assigned
controlling object by reassigning amounts from
the service representative's cost center to the
relevant controlling object.
You are able to enter any expenses incurred during your service activities.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 175/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-17
SAP AG 2004
Item Hierarchy
Enables items within the service order and the service confirmation
to be structured in the form of a hierarchy Used to show, for example, that certain spare parts belong to a
service or that a service consists of several individual services
Facilitates service order creation as partner and organization data is
inherited by sub-items from superior items
When you create a service order, you link the individual items to form a hierarchy by entering thenumber of the superior item in the field Higher-Level Item. As soon as you have maintained an higher-
level item, an additional tab Item Hierarchy displays where the item hierarchy is represented
graphically.
When values from sub-items are cumulated, this value is assigned to the higher-level item:
Pricing conditions can either be duplicated in all assigned sub-items or applied to the cumulated value of
all assigned sub-items.
A BAdI is provided to enable customers to define specific rules regarding the culmination of values.
You are able to define how the durations and quantities are to be cumulated using the BadI
CRM_SERVICE_I_HIER_CUM.
The standard delivery of SAP CRM includes the implementation CRM_SERVICE_I_CUM. This
implementation defines that only the sub-item quantities of the very next level are cumulated. If
these items themselves have sub-items with quantities, these quantities are not cumulated right up tothe top level.
The condition 0KUM is available for the culmination of pricing data. For this, the condition type
must be entered in the calculation procedure and the calculation procedure must be assigned to the
sales organization.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 176/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-18
SAP AG 2004
CompletedReleasedIn ProcessOpen
System Status
Additional System Status
Distribution Lock
Distributed
Additional Option: User Status (freely definable)
Status Management in the Service Process
Status Management in the service process occurs at the header and item level. The following system statuses exist at header and item level: Open (this is the initial status), In Process,
Released, Completed (the document can not be changed).
Additional statuses can be defined using the user status profile. The system status can be changed
automatically by changing the user status.
You can manually change both the system status and the user status.
The system sets the following additional statuses automatically:
Contains Errors: A document is incorrect if it contains data with errors. An incorrect document cannot
be distributed to R/3.
Billing document: in transfer, transferred, transfer error
The following system statuses are valid for the service processes that are transferred into R/3:
To Be Distributed: A document containing no errors should be distributed to R/3
Distributed: The document was created in R/3, or the changes were successfully copied to R/3. Distribution Failed: The data transfer was unsuccessful. The document could not be created in R/3, or
the changes could not be copied.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 177/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-19
SAP AG 2004
Basic Functions & Master Data
Damage/Cause Codes
Codes can be entered both atheader and item level to describe
or categorize the service order
subject, such as:
Description, Cause, Reason,
Location
Reference Objects
Such as business partners, or
products can be entered at header
level or item level
Product Proposal
Product proposals can be
generated and selected as items
during service order creation
Damage/Causes, Codes Codes, Catalogs and Profiles can be maintained in Customizing
BW analyses could be defined based on the codes entered in the service order.
Reference objects are the basis for:
Determining the responsible sales and service organization
Generating product proposals, quantities, and durations
Determining whether a contract or warranty exists
Product proposals example:
Change ink cartridge is a service of the product Printer T610
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 178/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-20
SAP AG 2004
Contract Determination/Warranty Check
Contract Determination
The system checks automatically duringcreation of the service order whether
contracts exists for the customer.
Warranty Check
The system checks automatically during
creation of the service order whether a
warranty exists for the product, object or
IBase that has been entered.
Credit Limit Check
It is possible to activate a credit check in
CRM Service Orders.
Contract Determination Service Level Agreement (SLA) dates are determined on the basis of the contract and overwrite
standard response dates and times in the service order
The object list in the service order shows which items are covered by the contract.
Warranty Check
Warranty data displays on a separate tab in the service order
Credit Limit Check
When a Service Order with Service Items is created and then released and saved, subsequent
processes such as the creation of assignments in the Resource Planning Tool are triggered.
If a Credit Check is active, the setting of the Released status is prevented if:
- The manual or automatic credit check has not been performed
- The result of the credit check is not OK
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 179/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-21
SAP AG 2004
Counter Integration: Features
Counters
Can be assigned to:
an Individual Object
an Installed Base
a Product
Counter Readings
Can be entered in:
CRM Service Orders
CRM Service Confirmations
CRM Service Plans
Counter Engine
Counter Administration Function
External Interface for Entering Counter Readings
Possible counter reading scenarios include: Recording service histories (for example, recording the mileage during the technical inspection of a
car)
Claiming services
(for example, recording the number of times that a customer was in contact with your consultancy
team during an implementation project)
Recording energy consumption
(for example, household gas or electricity readings)
Assessing warranty claims based on consumption
(for example, a car warranty is only valid for the first 30,000 miles)
Scheduling service plans
(for example, the next scheduled maintenance work should be scheduled after 1000 operating hours)
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 180/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-22
SAP AG 2004
Qualification Integration: Features
Qualifications
Service orders and service order items can contain qualificationrequirements
Qualification requirements are inherited by the service order items
from the service order header, and by sub-items from superior
items. They can also be changed manually by the user.
Qualification requirements can be assigned to the following:
Business Partner (Main Partner)
IBase / Component,
Service Product
Individual Object
ExampleThe service item Domestic Rewiring has the qualification requirement NICEIC Certified , meaning that
the employee who is assigned to do the job must be an electrician approved by the NICEIC (National
Inspection Council for Electrical Installation Council).
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 181/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-23
SAP AG 2004
Resource Planning: Topic Objectives
At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:
Describe the system landscape and relevant components
Use the resource planning tool
Set up the resource planning functions
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 182/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-24
SAP AG 2004
The Resource Planning Tool enables Resource
Planners to effectively manage, assign, and monitor
work to be performed by their service employees in
the field.
Resource Planning
Companies can use service resource planning to schedule and monitor services requested by a customer. As soon as a malfunction occurs in a product, the customer reports it to the service provider so that it can
be corrected. The resource planner can use the resource planning tool to schedule service employee
assignments to plan the necessary assignments on site, and to check that assignments are completed on
schedule.
Data about service employee availability and assignments is stored in the Workforce Management
Core (WFM Core).
In addition, you can use the integration with the Human Capital Management (HCM) component to
transfer time data for the individual service employees to the WFM Core, so that the time data is
available for resource planning.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 183/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-25
SAP AG 2004
Resource Planning
Create and
communicate
quotationMake inquiry
77
44
22 33
555
11
88
66
Convert
quotation into
service order
Accept
quotation
Execute
assignment,perform
confirmation
Create and
optimize
assignments
Create and
optimize
assignments
Approve
confirmation,assign costs
Bill customer,
perform analyses
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 184/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-26
SAP AG 2004
Resource Planning: Features
Features
System Landscape
Appointment Scheduling
Employee Availability
Employee Qualifications
Resource Planning Tool
Pager/Email/SMS/CTI Integration
Assignment Processing
Interface to External Scheduling Engines
Field Service Support
Groupware Integration
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 185/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-27
SAP AG 2004
System Landscape
Scheduling
Engine
mySAP
CRM
Business Object Layer RPTBusiness Object Layer RPT
RFC Communication via BAdI
Implementation CRM_SRV_SDL_RFC
RFC Communication via BAdI
Implementation CRM_SRV_SDL_WFM
BAdIBAdI CRM_SRV_SDLCRM_SRV_SDL
CRM
Service
Order
CRM
ResourcePlanning Tool
WFM Core
Third-PartyScheduler
SAP Business Connector
XML
Communication
Interface Architecture: Available Information: Business transaction type (Header)
Transaction number
Priority
Business transaction category (Item)
Product
Product description
Planned duration
Executing Service Team & Superior Org-unit
Customer (+ Zip Code, Street, Region)
Appointment dates
Customer required date
SLA dates (First reaction and finish) Resource table
Status
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 186/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-28
SAP AG 2004
Workforce Management (WFM) Core
CRMWFM Core
AddOn
with Built-In
Dispatcher
APO
WFM CoreAddOn
with Built-In
or liveCache
Dispatcher
WFM (Workforce Management) Core
is a component required in order toperform scheduling and contains the
following information:
Time data
(e.g. Employee availability data from
mySAP HCM, work schedule)
Resources
Object that represents the CRM
Business Partner in the role ‘Employee’ in
WFM Core
Demands – Service order items
Assignments – The link between a
Resource and a Demand
To do semiautomatic scheduling and appointment scheduling, you can use the WFM Core AddOn or theWFM Core in an APO Release 4.0.
Both dispatcher (Build-In and liveCache) support this. If you use the WFM Core in an APO Release
lower than 4.0, you have to use the life Cache for semiautomatic scheduling. Appointment Scheduling is
not possible with these APO Releases.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 187/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-29
SAP AG 2004
The Resource Planning scenario can be performed with or without
integration to mySAP HCM:
mySAP HCM Integration
Integration to
mySAP HCM
Employee
master
data
Existing HR employees can
be created via ALE as CRM
Business Partners in the role
Employee
Employee
availability
data
Detailed availability data from
the service employee HR
calendar can be displayed in
the CRM Resource PlanningTool
Employee
qualification
data
Existing HR employee
qualifications can be created
using ALE in CRM
Basic availability data (work
schedule) can be created via
report for the complete
service employee group
No integration to
mySAP HCM
Employees are created as
CRM Business Partners in the
role Employee in CRM
Employee qualifications and
qualification catalogs can be
created in CRM
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 188/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-30
SAP AG 2004
Appointment Scheduling
Appointment Scheduling with WFM Core
Enables you to offer your customer a selection of different appointmentsdetermined by the system based on different parameters.
Appointment scheduling could be done via the Interaction Center or via
the Internet
Appointment Scheduling with external Scheduling Engine
Optimized appointment scheduling
via Partners solutions supported
via a BAdI interface
This variant is used for contact centers that merely want to identify a request for service and indicate acustomer’s preferred date and time for that service to take place. In this case, agents do not offer specific
appointment dates and times to customers.
The ability to offer immediate appointments saves time for both the company and the customers, since
agents do not have to contact customers again at a later date to notify the customer of the appointment
date and time. In addition, appointment scheduling increases customer satisfaction, since the customer is
offered a confirmed appointment time during the first contact, rather than having to wait to be contacted
with appointment information.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 189/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-31
SAP AG 2004
Qualifications
Employee Qualifications
Describe the person’s the skills and licenses
Qualification Requirements
Are linked to
Business Partner (Main Partner)
IBase / Individual Object
Service Product or Product
Indicate that a service or spare part item requires a particular
qualification and detail necessary properties, such as proficiency
Can be fulfilled by human resources that have specific qualifications
Are inherited by the service order items from the service order
header, and by sub-items from superior items
It is possible to specify in Customizing how qualifications should be
determined
Can be manually changed by the user
The Following Scenarios will be Supported: CRM with WFM Core (or external scheduler) without mySAP HCM
CRM with WFM Core (or external scheduler) with mySAP HCM
- Qualifications of an employee are maintained in mySAP HCM and are distributed with the
employee
- Qualifications of an employee are maintained in mySAP HCM. The HR qualifications are not
distributed with the employee
Example
The service item Domestic Rewiring has the qualification requirement NICEIC Certified , meaning that it
must be performed by a field service employee who is an electrician approved by the NICEIC (National
Inspection Council for Electrical Installation Council).
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 190/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-32
SAP AG 2004
Ranking List
Ranking List
A ranked list of suitable serviceemployees displays for a service
item, based on the service
employee qualifications and
availability for the specified time
period.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 191/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-33
SAP AG 2004
Automatic Scheduling of Service Items
Assignments are created automatically in the Resource PlanningTool when the service order is saved
Can be defined for a particular item category
Multi-User Concept within the Resource Planning Tool
It is now possible for more than one Resource Planner to access
the Resource Planning Tool in Change mode at any one time
Assignment Processing
A BAdI is provided that
enables assignments to
be rescheduled if
scheduling relevant data
has changed in the
service order
Archiving of Assignments with the Service Order Functionality was also backported to mySAPCRM Release 3.0
Customizable Colors of Assignments with the Service Order
Assignment colors can be set in Customizing
Colors depend on the status of the assignment (Released, Communicated, Completed)
PRP Assignments in the Resource Planning Tool
Project Resource Planning assignments can display in the Resource Planning Tool
It is possible to branch directly from a Project Systems assignment into the PS project itself
Tasks and Activities in the Resource Planning Tool
CRM tasks and activities can be displayed in the Resource Planning Tool
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 192/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-34
SAP AG 2004
Service
Items
List
Gantt Area
Employees
Time
Assignments
Resource Planning Tool
The resource planning tool provides the resource planner with access to all information relevant forresource planning, that is, the service tasks to be completed and the time availability of the individual
service employees. Times always refer to the reference time zone for the resource planning tool. You
can also set other time zones. The system displays all time data with reference to the time zone selected.
When you start the resource planning tool, the service team that the resource planner is responsible for,
or the one that he last processed, displays automatically and an initial processing period is determined. If
the system cannot determine the service team, the resource planner must select it manually in the locator.
A service employee assignment is created when the resource planner assigns a service task to a service
employee. These assignments are represented as a horizontal bar in the Gantt area. The position of the
horizontal bar represents the duration (that is, start and finish) of the assignment. The color of the
horizontal bar changes in accordance with the assignment status. You can see the assignment status, the
number of the relevant service process, and the customer data in the horizontal bar.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 193/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-35
SAP AG 2004
Locator:
search
and
select
service
teams
Service Items List:
all service tasks
Sort/Filter function
Gantt Area:
availability
service
employee
assignments
Resource Planning Tool: Areas
Gantt Area: In addition to assignments, availability and availability descriptions display here. Theresource planner can use the calendar function to go to a specific day. Availability displays as
background, assignments and availability descriptions as horizontal bars, tasks and business activities as
symbols.
The colors have the following meanings:
White (background): Employee is available
Grey (background): Employee is not available
Green: Assignment has the status completed
Yellow: Everything is okay with the assignment
Red: The assignment must be checked. It has, for example, the status rejected and must be assigned to
another employee.
Red striped: The service employee is not assigned to the service team for this period.
You can open a service item directly from the service items list. The technicians’ tasks and activities also display in the Gantt area if the flag Display Business
Activity/Task is marked in the resource planner’s user settings.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 194/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 195/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-37
SAP AG 2004
Assigned
Released
Distributed
Accepted
Rejected
On site
Completed
Status of Employee Assignments
Assigned: A resource planner can reset the assignment to this status if he wants to prevent a serviceemployee from using a mobile device to call up the assignment.
Released: This is the initial status. This is set automatically as soon as the resource planner has created
an assignment. These assignments are immediately available for transfer to handheld devices.
Distributed: The status is set automatically as soon as the service employee has called up the
assignment using a handheld device. The resource planner must manually set the status to Distributed so
that assignments can be transferred to a mobile laptop.
Accepted: The Resource Planner sets this status when, for example, the service employee has agreed
over the telephone to perform the assignment. The status is set automatically as soon as the service
employee has called up the assignment using a mobile device.
Rejected: The resource planner can set this status when the service employee has, for example, rejected
the assignment over the telephone. The status is set automatically as soon as the service employee has
rejected the assignment using a mobile device. On site: This status is set automatically as soon as a service employee is on site at the customer site and
reports this using a mobile device.
Completed: This status is set automatically when the service employee has used a mobile device to
confirm that the assignment is complete or when a service confirmation has been entered as a follow-up
document.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 196/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-38
SAP AG 2004
The Resource Planner selects one or more service items that have not yet
been assigned and then selects one or more service employees to whom thework could be assigned.
The system proposes possible assignments based on the scheduling
strategy selected. The Resource Planner is then able to accept or reject the
assignments as required.
Automatic Scheduling
2 Hr
1 Hrs
3 Hrs
Service items
Helen Curtis Vacation
Break
Break
Break
Break
Break?
?
Employees 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
?
Jill Holding
Bob Star
Claire HopeDan Heath
Pete Joiner
?
You can use automatic scheduling as an alternative to, or in addition to the manual scheduling ofassignments. This function enables the system to determine when a service employee is available to
complete a specified service task. The determination is made using the duration specified in the service
item.
Optimization does not occur during automatic scheduling, it is simply a determination of the time gaps
in a resource planner’s assignment plan and an assignment proposal. If no relevant gaps are found for
the duration of the assignment between the customer required start and the customer required finish, the
system generates a corresponding message.
Prerequisites: To use automatic scheduling, you must have maintained scheduling strategies in the
Workforce Management Core.
You can use the following scheduling strategies for the automatic scheduling:
Forward scheduling
Forward scheduling with finish date Backward scheduling
Backward scheduling with start date
The proposal function can support the resource planner when free slots need to be found for one or more
service items, based strictly on employee availability. Example: An in-house PC support group in which
all team members are qualified to resolve the typical IT problems.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 197/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-39
SAP AG 2004
Send Short Message to Service Employee
Please accept/reject assignment 80000037/10
Service item 80000037/10 for Business
Partner 4711, has been assigned for
processing on 05.31.01
Address: 1127 Delaware Road Nth.
Indianapolis, IN46204
Contact: Robert Ash Tel. 317.784.9054
Priority: 2 - High
Duration: 4 hoursDescription: Standard installation...
Send Type Address
PAG 01718999123
PAG 01718999456
Send
Sending Short Messages
Messages can be sent to one or more
employees assigned to a service item
Employees can be called via mouseclick (CTI integration required)
Short messages can be sent to
individual employees
Send Short Message to Service Employee
22
33
11
22
33
11
This function enables you to send short messages to one or more service employees using the followingchannels: pager, mobile telephone (SMS), e-mail, fax. If the resource planner has already selected an
assignment, the data from the relevant service process and the transaction item is read and displayed as
text in a window. The resource planner can change this text before sending it.
Prerequisites: Before you can use this function, the corresponding address data for the service employee
must be defined in the business partner master record.
To transfer information about the assignment, the relevant transaction item and the transaction to the
short message, you must assign a suitable action profile either to the item category or to the transaction
type in Customizing. This action profile must contain an action definition that fulfills the following
prerequisites:
Under Partner Determination, the Partner-Dependent indicator must be set for the action and the
value 0025 must be set for the Partner Function.
The following e-mail settings must be defined for Smart Forms Mail with the transaction types foraction definition:
- Form name: name of your Smart Form form
- Processing class: CL_DOC_PROCESSING_CRM_ORDER
- Processing method: CRM_SRVORDER_EXEC_SMART_FORM
- Store mode: e-mail only
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 198/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-40
SAP AG 2004
Bidirectional data exchange
between the Resource PlanningTool in CRM Online and Mobile
Service:
Assignments
Absences
Attendances
Resource Planner located
in CRM Online
The service employee can
set a status
Integration with Mobile Service
With the functions of the Mobile Service client, the field employee can update assignments andsynchronize the latest changes with mySAP CRM, thus enabling the resource planner to modify plans
accordingly.
Mobile Service features:
Status change of service assignment: accept, reject, in process
Creation of absences and extra attendance in addition to usual working time
Data exchange with mySAP CRM and WFM
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 199/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-41
SAP AG 2004
Assignment Processing: Groupware Integration
Assignments can be
displayed in therespective employee
service calendar(s)
Supported for Lotus
Domino
and Microsoft Exchange
products
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 200/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-42
SAP AG 2004
Resource
Planner
Resource
Planner
Patricia Preston
Peter Johnson
Prerequisites: Organization
Service
Team
Service
Team
Jim BrownJoe Miller
Mary Black
A service team can be scheduled only by one resource planner at one time. In exceptional cases theresource planner can also take over the planning for another service team.
Each service employee is assigned to exactly one service team. Service employees are grouped, for
example, according to tasks to be completed or geographical criteria.
Service Employees: Service employees are managed in the system as business partners of the role
Employee. You must create master records as business partners for each service employee and can assign
business partner to a system user and a personnel number.
Service Organization: You have defined your organizational units and the organizational structure in
the following way: You have flagged organizational units that should be displayed in the resource
planning tool as Service Team. You have assigned positions to each service organization. You have
assigned a business partner (that is, a service employee) to each position; each service employee must
be assigned to exactly one service organization. If you want to assign a service employee to another
service organization, enter a date as a time limit up until which the service employee is responsible to theother service organization. Ensure that the dates for the assignments to the different service organizations
do not overlap, so that assignment is unique.
In Organizational Data Management, you have assigned a resource planner to a service team using
Goto → Resource Planner Assignment and have assigned a position to this resource planner. The
system users or business partners assigned to this position are the resource planners.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 201/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 202/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 203/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-45
SAP AG 2004
Service Order Management
Create and
communicate
quotationMake inquiry
77
44
22 33
55
11
88
666
Convert
quotation into
service order
Accept
quotation
Execute
assignment,perform
confirmation
Execute
assignment,perform
confirmation
Create and
optimize
assignments
Approve
confirmation,assign costs
Bill customer,
perform analyses
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 204/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 205/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-47
SAP AG 2004
Service Confirmation
Spare part items
The system determines the correct stock
Each spare part item updates the relevant stock and the
existing reservation
Service items
Confirmations update the Cross Application Time Sheet
(CATS) and the assigned controlling object in SAP R\3
Expense items
Each expense item documents an additional invoice thatis paid by the service representative, e.g. hotel receipt
Each expense item updates the assigned controlling
object by reassigning amounts from the service
representative's cost center to the relevant controlling
object
You can use the service confirmation to confirm working times, materials consumed, and expenses forservices performed.
The service confirmation is integrated with the following components:
mySAP CRM Billing
mySAP Materials Management
mySAP Financials
mySAP Human Resources
All costs that occur during a service visit can be charged to the customer.
There is no connection to R/3 travel management and to purchasing (confirmation of third-party
services).
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 206/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 207/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-49
SAP AG 2004
Item Hierarchy and Confirmation
Service Order Service Confirmation
Item1
Item 2
relevant
Item 3
Item 4
relevant
Item 5
Item 6
relevant
Item 7
relevant
Header
Item 2
relevant
Item 4
relevant
Item 6
relevantItem 7
relevant
The item hierarchy structure isdisplayed in the confirmation
when linked items are
confirmed:
Hierarchy
structure is not
shown in item
structure
Hierarchy
structure
is shown
in item
structure
You are able to freely select the items and sub-items that you want to confirm. When doing this, if youchoose items that are linked directly to one another (for example, Item 6 and Item 7), the hierarchy
structure is shown in the Item Hierarchy tab of the confirmation.
Item 2 and Item 4 are not directly linked to one another and therefore, display as independent items in
the confirmation because the item that links them together (Item 3) is not relevant for confirmation.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 208/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-50
SAP AG 2004
Confirmation
1
Confirmation
1
Confirmation
2
Confirmation
2
Confirmation
3
Confirmation
3
Billing
Document
Billing
Document
Service Confirmations without Service Process
Using service confirmations without service process, a service employee can perform a service for whichthere is no existing service process and enter this service so that billing and all other subsequent
processes are triggered.
Example: A customer asks a service employee, who is on site due to another order, to perform a repair.
Because the device failed only an hour ago and therefore, the customer has not yet reported the problem,
there is no existing service process from which the confirmation can occur. In this case, the service
employee can perform the repair and subsequently create a confirmation. In this way, the working time
and spare parts required for the repair can be invoiced to the customer.
Procedure:
Create a service confirmation directly.
Enter business partners, a transaction description, service products, and spare parts with the relevant
quantities.
If required, enter the service and valuation type for the confirmed services. Enter the damage code and/or cause.
Set the status to Completed and save the confirmation.
Result: All subsequent processes are triggered.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 209/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-51
SAP AG 2004
Service Confirmation Additional Information
Service type
Enables working times to be differentiated forbilling, for example as Senior Consultant, Junior
Consultant or Assistant
Valuation type
Enables working times to be differentiated, for
example, according to whether they are working
hours or overtime
Accounting indicator
Enables differentiation of normal confirmation
items and items for services, spare parts and
expenses covered by a warranty
Service Type For each service type you can define different external prices for billing the customer
Valuation Type
For each valuation type you can define:
- Prices for services billed to the customer
- Internal rates for employees
Accounting Indicator
For each accounting indicator you can define:
- Different discounts for services billed to the customer
- Different settlement receivers, for example, in case of warranty or good will
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 210/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-52
SAP AG 2004
Time and Material Confirmation Items
Service Product
e.g. Repair, Maintenance,
Consulting
Service Producte.g. Repair, Maintenance,
Consulting
Spare Part
e.g. hard disk from van
stock
Spare Part
e.g. hard disk from van
stock
Material
Withdrawal
Material
Withdrawal
CATS Time
Data
CATS Time
Data
Follow-up
document
Expense Item
e.g. hotel receipt
Expense Item
e.g. hotel receipt
CO
Reposting
CO
Reposting
Service product item: contains a product of the type Service. If the service product item contains a timeduration, time data is created in the Cross Application Time Sheet (CATS).
Confirmation relevant information in the service product:
Description
Planned duration
Conditions
Responsible sales area
This data includes default values for
Working time confirmation
Price determination in the billing
Spare part item contains a product of the type Material , which has been taken from the technician’s
stock. With the service confirmation, a goods receipt from the technician’s customer consignment stock
can be created in R/3. Each product for spare part items has a corresponding material master in SAP R/3.
The inventory management administers the material stock.
Expense Item contains a product from the type Service. You have to perform the following step in order
to get the expense item costs on the controlling object
Set up mapping for expense item category and cost element in the CRM specific part of the R/3 IMG
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 211/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-53
SAP AG 2004
R/3 OLTPR/3 OLTP
Costs
Salary
Material
Stock
WFM Core
Resource
Planning
CATS
CRM BillingCRM Billing
Billing Due List
Service ConfirmationService Confirmation
Service Product ItemService Product Item
Spare Part ItemSpare Part Item
Delete
Demand
Create CATS
document
Create material
document
Follow-up Action From Confirmation
Expense ItemExpense Item COReposting
Create CO
document
When you create a confirmation with reference to a service process with assignments, working time iscopied from these assignments to the confirmation document. When you confirm assignments, their
status is automatically changed to Completed in the resource planning tool (APO-WFM).
You can use service confirmations to trigger a sequence of external (customer-related) and internal
subsequent processes. In this context, billing is viewed as an external subsequent process and the
transfers to the HR, CO and MM components are viewed as internal subsequent processes. This is
controlled by the item category.
Time sheet (CATS) data is created by the confirmation of services, which is controlled using the flag
Relevant for Distribution in the item category. The service type and the evaluation type play an
important role in this context and can be set in Customizing.
The CATS transfer to Controlling (CO) is necessary to create cost information. The data transferred
from CATS to HR is used as the basis for the payroll.
Goods movements are triggered in R/3 when materials relevant to stock postings are confirmed. CO Reposting takes place after the confirmation is set to completed. The costs will be settled from the
cost center to the internal order.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 212/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-54
SAP AG 2004
Follow-Up Processing: CATS
HRHRHR COCOCO
Time ConfirmationTimeTime ConfirmationConfirmation
Transfer to mySAP
Human Resources(Report CAT6)
Transfer to mySAP
Financials(report CAT7)
Determination of the Controlling object
/ profitability segment
Determination of activity type and
absence and attendance type based on
service type and valuation type
Determination of cost center based on
the personnel ID
Determination of the Controlling object
/ profitability segment
Determination of activity type and
absence and attendance type based on
service type and valuation type
Determination of cost center based on
the personnel ID
Status of confirmation
is completed
Status of confirmation
is completed
CATS DB
CRM
Middleware
CRM
Middleware
When distributing relevant confirmation data, integration with a Cross-Application Time Sheet (CATS) is required. CATS enables standardized, cross-application recording of employee working
times.
Entries are created in the CATS database. The entry contains the information about the CO object, the
activity type, the attendance type, the time, the personal ID, and so on.
When recording the confirmation in the CATS, the system uses the attendance type and the absence type
from this data entry profile and the activity type from the personal master record.
The mySAP Human Resources is updated with the report CAT6 . Confirmed working times are used as
the basis for the payroll.
Controlling is updated with the report CAT7 .
The actual costs are calculated based on the corresponding activity type and the performing cost center.
Requirements:
A personal master record for each service employee is required (replication of SAP R/3 master datainto mySAP CRM).
The CATS data entry profile is required for the CRM system.
CATS supports only entries for single days (including night shifts). The difference between the start
and end of work in the confirmation, therefore, cannot be more than 24 hours.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 213/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-55
SAP AG 2004
Material Confirmation: Logistics Integration
Different spare parts scenarios
supported Spare parts at the service representative’s
storage location
Spare parts in the service representative’s
consignment stock
Spare parts in customer’s consignment
stock
Spare parts at the service representative’s storage location. Each service representative’s stock is represented by a storage location in the service plant
Spare parts in the service representative’s consignment stock.
The service representative’s stock is managed as service representative’s consignment stock.
Identification occurs using the service representative’s unique personnel number which is managed in
the employee master record in SAP CRM and in the customer master record in SAP R/3.
Spare parts in customer’s consignment stock
A stock of spare parts that is stored on the customer’s premises but does not belong to the customer
(for example, construction site equipment), and is managed as customer consignment stock
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 214/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-56
SAP AG 2004
Expense Confirmation: CO Reposting
Cost
Center
CostCost
Center Center CO ObjectCOCO ObjectObject
Expense
Confirmation
ExpenseExpense
ConfirmationConfirmation Determination of the Controlling
object / profitability segment
Determination of cost center
based on the personnel ID
Determination of cost element
based on customizing mapping
Determination of the Controlling
object / profitability segment
Determination of cost center
based on the personnel ID
Determination of cost element
based on customizing mapping
Status of confirmation
is completed
Status of confirmation
is completed
CO Reposting
CRM
Middleware
CRM
Middleware
Receipt
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 215/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-57
SAP AG 2004
Status Management in the Service Confirmation
CompletedOpen
System Status
Additional System Status
Distribution Status
Cancelled Internally
Billing Document Cancelled
Additional Option: User Status (freely definable)
Open is the initial status and is set by the system when creating service confirmations. You can stillmake changes to the confirmation document in this status. The system sets the status Distribution Lock
as soon as the open status is set to prevent the document from being transferred to R/3.
You set the Completed status manually for all items either at item level or at header level. If you
manually set all items to Completed , the system automatically sets the header as Completed . As soon as a
document has the status Completed , you can no longer make changes to it. If you determine that the
document is incorrect, you must cancel it.
If you set the Completed status, the system sets the corresponding To Be Distributed status. This status
changes to the status Distributed Successfully if the distribution is successful or to the status Incorrect
Distribution, if the distribution failed. The system proceeds in a similar way with reference to billing.
Cancelled Internally or Billing Document Cancelled: You can use these two statuses to cancel the
following:
Documents that have not yet been distributed: The document is canceled in the CRM system to prevent distribution.
Documents that have already been distributed for billing and internal processing: Cancellation
documents are generated to reverse postings made in integrated SAP systems, for example, changes
made to stock as the result of spare parts being confirmed.
When a document has one of these statuses, no additional changes of status are possible.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 216/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 217/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-59
SAP AG 2004
Service Order Management
Create and
communicate
quotationMake inquiry
777
44
22 33
55
11
888
66
Convert
quotation into
service order
Accept
quotation
Execute
assignment,perform
confirmation
Create and
optimize
assignments
Approve
confirmation,
assign costs
Approve
confirmation,assign costs
Bill customer,
perform analyses
Bill customer,
perform analyses
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 218/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-60
SAP AG 2004
Amount Allocation: Definition
Amount Allocation offers the ability to define who should
pay which expenses shortly before billing takes place.
Amount Allocation allows:
Grouping of items and sub-items
Description of price reductions with the accounting indicator
Splitting (on header and item level for Service Order and Service
Confirmation with inheritance from header to item) into different
payers or bill-to-parties
Expenses
RecipientRecipient
RecipientRecipient
Recipient
You can use amount allocation to allocate the value of a billing document, or the value of individualitems in a service order to several invoice recipients or payers. You can make this allocation in the order
or in the confirmation, or in the amount allocation document itself, whereby allocation to the respective
follow-up document is copied as a default value but can still be changed.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 219/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-61
SAP AG 2004
Amount Allocation
Confirmation BillingOrder
Billing
Document
Release
Amount
Allocation
When Does the Process Take Place?
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 220/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-62
SAP AG 2004
Amount Allocation Process
For items released for billing
Billing-relevant items from the
service order andconfirmations
Changing
of rule for
amount
allocation
Overview
of billed
items
Overview
of items
with errors
Release
for billing
Amount Allocation
Possible to define shortly before billing takes place, who should pay which expenses Often, prices are defined at a very late stage flexible price changes are possible
Settlement information is not always known at the time of order creation
Checks and corrections can be performed shortly before billing takes place
- Change of billing relevance (for example, warranty, goodwill)
- Change of invoice recipient
A field service employee can often not decide himself, how much the customer or the insurers should
pay
The settlement of expenses is possible at different times during the service process:
Settlement is performed monthly, even if the service has not yet been completed
Settlement is performed once the service has been completed
Partial billing of services possible
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 221/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 222/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 223/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-65
SAP AG 2004
Service Billing: Topic Objectives
At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:
Create billing documents for services that have been performed
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 224/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 225/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-67
SAP AG 2004
The whole billing process comprises three major steps:
Input processing
Billing
Output processing
CRM Billing: Process Overview
CRM Billing
BillingInput
Processing
Billing
Due
List
Output
SAP
FITransfer
SAPBW
Extraction
O u t p u t P r o
c e s si n g
Other
ApplicationsConnection
mySAP
CRM
-
Invoice
documents
Cancel
lation
Cancel
lation
FB1
The process flow for creating and issuing invoices using CRM Billing can be divided into three sub- processes:
Input processing
Billing
Output processing
During input processing, CRM Billing takes over billing-relevant items from different business
transactions and saves them as billing due list items. From the billing due list, you can process both
single and collective billing from billing due list items and also trigger these to run in the background.
During billing, related billing due list items are also grouped together as far as possible from different
CRM business transactions and transferred to a joint billing document.
Through cancellation, you can cancel individual billing documents and also execute collective
cancellations. The system transfers information on cancellations automatically to mySAP Financials.
Output processing consists of invoice output, the transfer to mySAP Financials and retrieval for SAPBW. You can choose from different output media (for example, print, fax or e-mail) for invoice output,
although output takes place using SAP Smart Forms. The ledger posting of billing data takes place either
in accounts receivable (SAP FI-AR) or in contract accounting (SAP FI-CA). CRM Billing provides all
relevant billing data for the SAP BW for statistical reporting.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 226/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-68
SAP AG 2004
Billing
Due
List
Transaction-
related
Transaction-
related after
confirmation
Transaction-
related
according todelivery quantity
Delivery-related
Billing Options
Service ConfirmationService Confirmation
Service Product ItemService Product Item
Spare Part ItemSpare Part Item
Service ProcessService Process
Service Product ItemService Product Item
Spare Part ItemSpare Part Item
Sales Product ItemSales Product Item
Expense ItemExpense Item
Expense ItemExpense Item
How services are billed is triggered by the Billing Relevance indicator in the item category. Transaction-related billing: In CRM, the Billing Engine is called up for a transaction, for billing the
order quantity. This billing type is used for a flat-rate billing with reference to a service process item or
for resource-related billing with reference to a service confirmation item.
Transaction-related billing after confirmation: In CRM, the Billing Engine is called up for a service
process item for billing the order quantity (flat-rate), if the item has been confirmed. Furthermore, the
items have to be released for billing (transaction CRM_SRVBIL).
Transaction-related billing according to delivery quantity: In CRM, the Billing Engine is called up
for a sales product item, for billing the cumulated delivery quantity. The delivery in SAP R/3 returns the
delivery quantity to the sales product item.
Delivery-related billing: Deliveries for sales product items in R/3 are billed with the Billing Engine in
CRM. In the last two cases, you must make sure that the corresponding item category in R/3 is set to Not
relevant for billing . Two different scenarios are used depending on whether you have agreed on a fixed price with the
customer or whether resource-related billing should take place.
Fixed Price: In this case, the service process item must be flagged as billing-relevant, however, the
confirmation item must not.
Resource-Related Billing: The confirmation item must be flagged as billing relevant, however, the
service process item must not. You can also combine fixed price and resource-related billing.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 227/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 228/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-70
SAP AG 2004
mySAP Financials Integration enables
smooth communication between SAP CRMand SAP R/3.
You can define your company’s controlling-
relevant service processes.
You can also use the mySAP Financials
integration to qualify and analyze the entire
value flow for a service process including
costs and revenues.
Controlling Integration
You can use the integration of service and sales processes with Controlling in mySAP Financials totransfer controlling-relevant data from CRM to an R/3. In this way, you can analyze the entire value
flow (including costs and expenses) for services and sales orders.
You can display and evaluate costs and revenue for services, for example, for each product category or
service organization.
Services are billed using CRM Billing. Costs are either updated to the profitability segment or to the
internal order.
Sales orders are billed using CRM Billing or R/3 Billing. Expenses are updated to the profitability
segment. Costs are updated only for delivery-related billing.
The service confirmation updates the costs for the consumption of resources either to the profitability
segment or to the internal order.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 229/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 230/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-72
SAP AG 2004
Controlling Types
Three Controlling Types
Mass-Object Controlling
Single-Object Controlling
Controlling for Account Assignment
Recipient
The customer must make the settings for all transaction types in the Controlling Integration table. The customer defines transactions types, organizational units and so on in the CRM System and must
replicate these in R/3. The customer then makes the following settings in Customizing:
Business Scenario
Technical settings that control the interaction between the application and R/3 Controlling are defined
using the business scenario
There is the business scenario for CRM Service and for CRM Sales
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 231/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-73
SAP AG 2004
Mass-Object-Controlling
Mass-Object Controlling
Costs and revenues are assigned directly to a profitability
segment
Analysis of goods sold and revenues in CO-Profitability Analysis
(CO-PA) with original mySAP CRM attributes, e.g. service
organization, product category
A profitability segment is an object within Profitability Analysis (CO-PA) to which costs and revenuesare assigned. It corresponds to a market segment. You can calculate the profitability of a profitability
segment by comparing its sales revenues with its costs.
A profitability segment in an operating concern is defined by a combination of characteristic values.
All service transactions with the same CO-PA characteristics are assigned to the same profitability
segment.
In SAP, BW you are able to evaluate the single service transaction even if you have chosen mass object
controlling.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 232/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-74
SAP AG 2004
Single Object Controlling
Single Object Controlling
Controlling by service order or by service contract
Cost and revenues are assigned to the internal order
Overheads and process costs can be applied
Results analysis
If you use settlement of costs and revenues to CO-PA aggregated
analysis on CRM attributes is possible
Settlement of costs and revenues to CO-PA or other recipients
Original CRM attributes are available on the internal order
In SAP R/3, the single object controlling´s level is defined for each relevant transaction type, serviceunit, and responsible service unit.
For the controlling type single object controlling , you have to define a controlling scenario.
The following parameters are defined by the controlling scenario:
- Pricing procedure, Overhead key, Results analysis key- Settlement profile, Object class, Residence time 1 and 2 for the archiving
- CO partner update
The controlling relevant characteristics are replicated in SAP R/3.
It is possible to differentiate the calculation of costs for the following:
Special qualifications, such as for a specialist or apprentice
Standard working time, overtime, driving hours, and so on
You differentiate the calculation of costs by doing the following:
Replicating the item category, the service type, and the valuation type into R/3 (based on the CRM
customizing) and
Defining some transformation in the Plug-In customizing.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 233/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-75
SAP AG 2004
Additional Features for Single Object Controlling
Planned Costs and Revenues
Accounting Indicator
Cockpit for Controlling Integration
Planned Costs and Revenues Determination of planned costs including surcharges based on order planning for services, spare parts
and expenses
Determination of planned revenues based on billable services, spare parts and expenses within a
service order
Comparison of planned and actual values on an internal order representing a service order
Accounting Indicator
Confirmation of used resources with information about the reason e.g. warranty, good will
Differentiation of actual costs in addition to cost element
Determination of different settlement receivers based on accounting indicator via customizing
More accurate calculation of work in process possible
Cockpit for Controlling Integration
Manages error messages that are only relevant for Controlling- The internal order for a service order can be created, the settlement rule can not be created. This is
irrelevant for the CRM process, but is relevant for the Controlling process
- Errors occurred during costing are only shown in the cockpit
Supports the maintenance of master data and settlement rules for internal orders belonging to service
orders or confirmations
Integrates reporting for the controlling of internal orders
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 234/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-76
SAP AG 2004
Controlling for Account Assignment
Controlling for Account Assignment Object
Controlling by service order or by service confirmation
Cost and revenues are assigned to the cost receiver
Supports the receiver types: internal order, WBS element, sales
order item, network activity or customer defined cost receivers
via business add-in
Additional controlling functions depending on receiver type
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 235/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-77
SAP AG 2004
CRM
R/3Availability Information
(On plant Level)
Service Order
Service ItemSpare Part 1
Spare Part 2
R/3
Reservation
(on plant Level)
Dispatching of
Service Technician
Reservation
ATP information
Disposition
Delivery
Material Confirmation
Stock Update(depending on
Logistic Scenario)
Update of Reservation
Goods Issue
Update Reservation
Logistic Integration
Transfer Parameter Goods Movement You can define different movement types and special stock indicators that are required by an external
system to execute a goods movement.
The movement type and special stock indicator created are dependent on transaction types and item
categories
Mapping Plant and Storage Location to Service Structure
You can define which plant and which storage location of this plant is assigned to a combination of
service organization, service team, and service employee.
The assignment applies to service processes in CRM Online and is used to determine the correct plant
and storage location when withdrawing or reserving spare part items
Availability-to-Promise Information for Service
During the service order creation, availability information from R/3 is possible.
Reservation You can create a reservation after saving the service order.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 236/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-78
SAP AG 2004
Product Service Letter: Topic Objectives
At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:
Explain the concept of mySAP CRM PSL Management
Carry out the relevant tasks for PSL Management
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 237/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-79
SAP AG 2004
Product Service Letter
The product service letter (PSL) is an official document issued by
the manufacturer (usually) documenting a service
directive/request for a certain range of products and the
conditions of the service to be performed
The reason for issuing a service letter is usually either a potential
or identified technical failure and/or avoiding costly correction
measures of the product
Product Service Letter
Different types of PSL Safety PSL (Call-Back / Recalls)
- Safety hazard
- As soon as possible
- Does not expire, no end-date
- In most countries a legal requirement. Often monitored by legal authorities. Consumer protection.
- Owner of equipment will be contacted
- Full reimbursement from manufacturer is normal
Commercial PSL
- To eliminate potential failure to prevent costly correction measures
- From as-soon-as-possible up to an end-date
- Reimbursement ranging from full claimable up to clearly defined limits between Manufacturer –Dealer and Customer
Support PSL’s (often called Service Bulletins)
- Frequent problems discovered by the manufacturer can lead to a PSL
- Is not mandatory
- Are chargeable after warranty has expired
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 238/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-80
SAP AG 2004
Product Service Letter Management
Solution covering the Dealer/Serviceprovider operational side of the PSLmanagement
Automatic load of PSL’s including ServiceTemplate to store the details regarding theactivities to be carried out
Manual creation of PSL and ServiceTemplate and link of these
Search for affected products (individualobjects) when creating a PSL
Search for valid PSL‘s when referencingan ind. Object in the service order
Amount allocation and Billing/Claiming
Product Service Letter
Product Service Letter Management (Operations) OEM Support
- Support for an OEM to maintain, distribute and analyze PSL‘s.
- Distribute to other partners (and systems).
- Enable the OEM to generate the necessary report for various authorities and organizations.
Multi-tier Support
- OEM distributes the PSL‘s to Dealers and Service Providers. The Dealers and Service Providers
can then again distribute it within their organization or region.
Dealer/Service Provider support
- Electronically receive PSL‘s.
- Electronically send PSL status to issuer.
- Support for a Dealer / Service provider to maintain, distribute and analyze their own PSL’s. This is
especially interesting when a Dealer/Service provider has his own product range. High level description of the PSL
- Reason, affected products and/or ranges of products, validities, severity.
- General descriptions such as problem description, solution approach, necessary activities to be
taken, etc.
Detail description of PSL
- Detailed execution instructions of the tasks to carry out, parts and tools required.
- Service Templates are ‘execution ready’ documents used to speed up the order planning and
execution process.
Claim Integration
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 239/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-81
- The execution efforts (costs) are normally claimable to the manufacturer.
- Reimbursement rules may cover a split of the costs ( amount allocation) between different parties
like manufacturer, dealer, insurance company, customer, etc.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 240/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-82
SAP AG 2004
Product Service Letter Management (PSL)
Note: Numbers correspond to chapters
OEM determines a
PSL is required
11
Product Service Letter
Processing
33
PSL is assigned to Service
Order for customer ind.
Object
Set Amount
Allocation and
Bill Partners
66
55
Change status of PSLand inform OEM
22
Service Provider Receives
PSL and inform customers
77
Analyze PSL
44
Service Order with
PSL is carried out and
confirmed
The OEM determines that a product improvement is needed for one of its products and creates a ProductService Letter that is sent to the dealers and service providers. The OEM sends information regarding the
tasks, parts, and tools required for the PSL.
The dealer receives the PSL and updates his service system with the information. The additional
information regarding the tasks, parts, and tools is created as a Service Template. The Service Template
is linked to the PSL. The dealer then informs the customers if necessary.
When a customer orders service for an equipment where a valid PSL exist the system determines open
service letters and/or the service manager enhances the service order with a PSL relevant task
The service employee performs the service and performs confirmation for the work done, materials used
etc.
The confirmation status of the PSL of a specific object is changed and the OEM is informed that the PSL
has been carried out for this individual Object
Setting the Amount Allocation the service manager defines who has to pay which part of the PSL taskand Bills the relevant partners
The service manager performs analyzes of the PSL processing.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 241/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-83
SAP AG 2004
Product Service Letter – Basic Architecture
Issuer
(e.g. Manufacturer)
Executor
(e.g. Service
Provider, Dealer)
Service Order Service Order
PSL Confirmation
PSL Confirmation
Product Service Letter
Manufacturer
Product Service Letter
Dealer Site
Distribution PSL
Confirmation PSL
to issuer
Confirmation PSL
from Order
Billing/Claim
(Dealer)Billing/Claim
(Dealer)
Invoice
receipt(Manufacturer)
Invoice
receipt(Manufacturer)
Level Product Service Letter
Management
Service Order
Management
Invoicing
Communication to Customer
Definition
(Create)
Identification
(Check)
Execution and
Confirmation (Order)
Amount
Allocation /
Settlement
Analytics
Confirmation
PSL (Issuer)
Invoice
receipt(other partners)
Invoice
receipt(other partners)
44
66
33
11
2277
55
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 242/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-84
SAP AG 2004
Service Process Customizing: Topic Objectives
At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:
Perform the customizing settings for service process
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 243/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 244/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-86
SAP AG 2004
Leading Business Transaction Category
Contract Determination
Procedures and Profiles
Service Transaction Type
Each transaction type has a key and a long text. The Leading Business Transaction category specifies the leading business context in which a transaction
type can be used.
Status object type: If this field is empty, the status object type COI is chosen for the item and the status
object type COH for the header.
Contract determination:
No contract determination
Item level, assign if one corresponding contract found: For service contracts, the system searches for
contracts that exist for the specific customer, and for the reference object, sales organization,
distribution channel, and, if applicable, the service organization for which the service order is issued.
Item level, display all corresponding contracts
You have the option of using the BAdI definition CRM_SERVICE_CONTRACT to include BAdIs
(BAdIs for service contract selection), which you can use to provide your own selection criteria or tolimit the selection criteria delivered by SAP.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 245/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-87
SAP AG 2004
Sales:
Document pricing procedure
Service:
Subject Profile
Transaction Type for Handheld confirmation
Business Activity:
Default values
Business Transaction Category: Header
A business transaction type is assigned to one or more business transaction categories (for example,
activity, sales). The business transaction category defines the business context in which the transaction
type can be used (for example, service, sales, activity). One business transaction category always is the
leading business transaction category. This is not related to other business transaction categories in a
hierarchical sense, but displays a preference.
For a Service Transaction, you must assign the business transaction categories Activity and Service
Transaction. Sales Transaction is optional but necessary for pricing.
For a Service Confirmation, you must assign the business transaction categories Activity and Service
Confirmation. Service Transaction and Sales Transaction are optional.
The document pricing procedure is used to determine the pricing procedure.
The subject profile is a grouping of code group profiles from different catalogs. This can be done on a
structured basis, which enables the creation of a hierarchy.
The transaction type for confirmation is selected when a confirmation is entered via hand-held
devices.
Business Activities: default values for Priority, Category, Destination and Direction. Processing the
Task , Calendar , and Subject profile fields has no effect, because these fields are not used in Service.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 246/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-88
SAP AG 2004
Different settings according to business
transaction category
Assign business transaction categories
Only certain combinations are permitted
Customizing at item level:Customizing at item level:
Assign business transaction categories:Assign business transaction categories:
Item attributes and characteristics:
Controlling attributes
Item object type
Define item category:Define item category:
Service Process Customizing: Item
The following predefined item categories are contained in the standard CRM system and can be used
for the service process:
SRVP: You use this item category for service products, that is, products of the type Service.
SRVM: You use this item category for spare parts, that is, products of the type Material.
SRVS: You use this item category for service sales products, that is, products of the type Material that
can be sold and delivered via the R/3.
SRVE: You use this item category for expense items.
SVCP: You use this item category for service products confirmation.
SVCM: You use this item category for service material confirmation.
SVCE: You use this item category for expense confirmation.
First you define the general settings, which are the same attributes for all types of item categories.
General data: item object type.
Procedures and Profiles: text, partner, status, APO availability check (only for sales items, for spare
parts the R/3 availability information is used), organizational data, dates, actions.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 247/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-89
In the second step, you define the business context for which the item category is used. Settings differ
depending on the assigned business transaction category.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 248/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 249/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 250/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-92
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 251/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-93
SAP AG 2004
Replication of CRM data to R/3 :
Transaction types
Item categories
Organizational units
Service types
Valuation types
Product categories
Controlling Type and Level
Controlling Scenario
For Single Object Controlling
Controlling Integration
Replication: You can replicate the characteristics of service processes (contracts, orders and
confirmations) that you want to use for Controlling in R/3.
The Controlling Scenario is needed for single object controlling and defines how the internal orders
that are created from CRM are described. The following parameters are defined by the controlling
scenario: costing sheet, overhead key, results analysis key, settlement profile, object class, and functional
area.
The Controlling Type and Controlling Level are defined for combinations consisting of a transaction
type, a service organization, and a responsible service organization for a certain validity period. There
are several options:
No Controlling
Mass-Object Controlling (profitability segment)
Single-Object Controlling (internal order) on business transaction level Single-Object Controlling (internal order) on item level
Controlling for Account Assignment
If you assigned single-object controlling to the Controlling type, you must also specify the Controlling
Scenario.
For single-object controlling, the internal order is always created with the order type SAPS .
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 252/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-94
SAP AG 2004
Service Process: Unit Summary
You are now able to:
Describe contents and functions of the service process
Know the steps for service processing
Create a service process
Create a service confirmation
Perform the customizing settings for service process
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 253/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 254/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 255/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 256/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-98
Exercises
Unit: Service Order Management
Topic: Resource Planning
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Maintain data for resource planning
• Use the resource planning tool
• Use the appointment scheduling functionality
In the role of a resource planner, you plan the service tasks byassigning a service technician, who has the required
qualifications. Than you monitor the execution of the assignments
and check the assignment status.
2-1 Create an assignment for your service order. Open the resource planning tool.
2-1-1 Search your service technician group.
If you want to create an assignment you have to first check the service techniciangroup.
Open the locator with the Locator button.
Expand the Service Team tree and use the structured search to find the service
team.
2-1-2 Check the qualification requirements of your service order.
2-1-3 Use the ranking functionality to determine a technician.
Which is the best service technician for the job?
_______________________________________
2-1-4 Create an assignment.
Create an assignment for Lou Windham:
2-1-5 Change status of the assignment.
Change the status into Informed.
Check the color of the assignment.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 257/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-99
_____________________________
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 258/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-100
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 259/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-101
Exercises
Unit: Service Order Management
Topic: Service Confirmation
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Confirm time and material
Time and material data is confirmed by the technician.
3-1 Create a service confirmation with reference to a service order
3-1-1 Open your service order to do a follow-up confirmation.
Search for your service process
After finding your service process, create a follow-up confirmation.
3-1-2 Copy all the items into your confirmation.
3-1-3 Enter Lou Windham as the Service Technician
In the confirmation header area, in the Service Employee field, delete the entry and
enter Windham.
3-1-4 Mark the confirmation items as complete.
Choose Save.
Make a note of the service confirmation number.
________________________________
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 260/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-102
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 261/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 262/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-104
You will receive a list with all postings.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 263/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-105
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 264/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-106
Exercises
Unit: Service Order Management
Topic: Service Billing
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Create billing documents for service
The services are charged.
5-1 Create a billing document
5-1-1 Maintain the billing due list.
Select Maintain Billing Due List and select the billing application CRMB.
Insert your confirmation document number and select Execute (F8).
Expand the transactions to see what is billed.
Select all transactions and choose Individual Billing .
Save the billing documents.
5-1-2 Display the billing documents.
Call up Maintain Billing Documents and select Payer ##MEGASTORE.
What are the billing document numbers?
_________________________________
Check FI integration of the billing document.
Mark one item and select the Display Document Flow button.
Mark the invoice and select the Display Accounting Documents button.
You receive a list with all relevant accounting documents.
Which FI documents were generated?
______________________________
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 265/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-107
With a double click, you can jump directly to the controlling documents.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 266/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 267/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-109
Exercises
Unit: Service Order Management
Topic: Service Controlling
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Display costs and revenues for your service process
The result for each service process is analyzed.
6-1 Display order result
Display the CO orders that have been generated from your service process.
6-1-1 What is the document number?
_________________________
Call up the cost analysis. Extras→ Cost Analysis.
What are the planned and actual costs for the service and the spare part?
__________________________________________________________
6-1-2 Compare actual and planned costs and revenues.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 268/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-110
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 269/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 270/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 271/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 272/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-114
2-1-4 Create assignment
Choose your service order.
Choose the technician you would like to assign to the order.
Choose Create Assignment at the top of the screen.
It will use the default time from the service order to create the assignment.
2-1-5 Change status of assignment
Right mouse click on the assignment.
Choose Details.
Change the status of the assignment to Informed.
Choose Copy.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 273/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-115
Solutions
Unit: Service Order Management
Topic: Service Confirmation
3-1 Create a service confirmation with reference to a service order
3-1-1 Create a follow-up service confirmation from your service order..
Log on to the Enterprise Portal with the user name provided by the trainer.
Navigate to Service & Support → Orders.
In the Get field, select Transaction Number and in the second field, enter your
service process number.
Choose Go.
Your service order will display.
Choose Expand and then Create Confirmation.
In the dialog-box, select Confirmation. A second window browser will display.
3-1-2 Copy all the line items into the confirmation.
Item Selection tab
Choose Copy All
The Transfer column will display a green check showing transferred items.
3-1-3 Enter Service technician Lou Windham.
In the confirmation header area, in the Service Employee field, delete the current
entry and enter Windham.
Field Name or Data Type Values
Service Employee 400440
Enter
3-1-4 Mark the confirmation complete and save your confirmation.
Choose the Expand icon and then Complete items.
Choose Save.
Transaction number: see system message
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 274/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-116
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 275/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-117
Solutions
Unit: Service Order Management
Topic: R/3 Integration
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Post Cost to the corresponding controlling objects
• Post goods issue
Time and material data is posted in R/3.
4-1 Integration with R/3
The confirmations have created time data records in the cross application time sheet
(CATS). A supervisor would review the time records for the technicians’ work and then
(because you have not set up automatic transfer to accounting) the supervisor would initiatethe transfer of the data. In this exercise, you will perform these supervisory functions.
In addition, in R/3 you want to view the material goods movements that were created by
the confirmation for the parts used from the technician’s van stock.
4-1-1 CATS Integration
Navigate to R/3 Integration→ CATS Transfer to Controlling
Enter the HR employee number for Lou Windham 10451.
Execute (F8) and the cost information will transfer to accounting.
4-1-2 Stock Overview
Navigate to R/3 Integration→ Stock Overview R/3
Enter the material R-1130 and choose Execute (F8)
You receive a stock overview for all plants and storage locations.
Use the menu path at the top: Environment → Material Movements
to view the material document list for material R-1130.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 276/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-118
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 277/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-119
Solutions
Unit: Service Order Management
Topic: Service Billing
5-1 Create a billing document
5-1-1 Maintain the billing due list.
Navigate to IDES→ Billing .
Select Maintain Billing Due List and select the billing application CRMB.
Insert your confirmation document number and choose Edit (F8)
Expand the transactions to see what is billed.
Select all transactions and choose Individual Billing .
Save the billing documents.
5-1-2 Display the billing documents.
Navigate to IDES→ Billing .
Call up Maintain Billing Documents and select by Payer ##MEGASTORE.
Choose Maintain Billing Documents
Check accounting integration of the billing document by the following steps:
Mark one item and select the Display Document Flow button.
Mark invoice and select the Display Accounting Documents button.
You receive a list with all relevant accounting documents.
With a double click , you can jump directly to the accounting documents.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 278/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-120
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 279/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-121
Solutions
Unit: Service Order Management
Topic: Service Controlling
6-1 Display order result
Navigate to R/3 Integration→ Display Internal Order .
6-1-1 Display the internal orders that have been generated from your service process and
your service confirmation.
Use the F4 help to search your internal order. Use the search Internal OrderCreated by CRM Service. Enter your service order number as search criteria
Choose the internal order by doubleclicking.
Enter.
6-1-2 Call up the cost analysis by using the menu path Extras → Cost Analysis.
Compare actual and planned costs and revenues.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 280/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-122
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 281/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-123
Solutions
Unit: Service Order Management
Topic: Service Quotation
1-2 Create a Service Quotation.
In the CRM system in SAPgui, use the menu path:
SAP Menu→ Service→ Maintain Service Processes
1-1-1 Create a service quotation of type HT Quot. → Service.
From the menu: Business Transaction →Create.
In the pop-up box, choose the service quotation type: HT Quot. →Service
1-1-2 Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Values or Action
Description Service for ##
Customer ##Megastore
Priority High
Enter
1-1-3 Enter a service product SRV1_4 (Repair) with quantity 1.
Field Name or Data Type Values
Product SRV1_4
Quantity 1
Enter
The item category is: SRQP (SAP Service Product Item).
If a pop-up menu indicates that one or more contracts exist for the customer, choosethe No Assignment button.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 282/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-124
1-1-4 Enter a spare part item R-1130 (Keyboard, English) with quantity 1.
Choose Item Details.
Choose the Spare Parts tab
Field Name or Data Type Values
Product R-1130
Quantity 1
Enter .
The item category is: SRQM (SAP Service Material Item)
If a pop-up menu indicates that one or more contracts exist for the customer, choosethe No Assignment button.
1-1-4 View the status.
On the Overview tab, see the field Status which shows Quotation status for the
items.
To view the transaction header status, choose Transaction Data. On the Status tab,it shows the service quotation is released.
1-1-6 Net value of service quotation and gross value of service quotation can be found on
the Prices tab on header and item level.
1-1-7 Save your quotation. Note your transaction number _______________________
1-2 Create a service order of the type Service Process as a follow-up document.
1-2-1 While in your service quotation, choose the button Create Follow Up Transaction
at the top of the screen.
Choose Service Process→ Service Process
You are now in the service process.
Copy all the line items from the quotation into the service order.
9. Select the items and press Copy.
10. You may now view the copied items on the Overview tab.
Choose Save.
Note your transaction number _______________________________.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 283/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-125
Solutions
Unit: Service Order Management
Topic: Resource Planning
2-1 Start the Resource Planning Tool to create an assignment for a service technician.
Menu path: SAPmenu→ Service Resource Management→ Resource Planning→ Start
Resource Planning Tool
2-1-2 If necessary, search for the service technician group using the Locator .
Choose Locator
Open Service Team and click on Search Term Enter part of the name of the Service employee group in the With Name field and
use an asterisk (*) as a wildcard in your search.
Field Name or Data Type Values
Service Employee Group US Service Employee Group
1
2-1-2 Check qualifications
To check the qualification requirements of the service order, find your service order
item within the list viewer .
Highlight your service item and use the right mouse button.
Choose the entry Qualification requirements from the list. The result will be a list
with all the qualifications that are needed to perform the service.
Choose Continue to close the pop-up box.
2-1-3 Ranking List
Select all the employees by right mouse clicking on the name of the servicetechnician group and choosing the option Select All Service Employees from a drop-
down list.
Right mouse click on the row with your service process item and a drop-down list
appears. Choose Ranking List .
You will receive a ranking list, which helps to determine the best-suited service
technician.
Choose Cancel to exit the ranking list.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 284/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 285/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-127
Solutions
Unit: Service Order Management
Topic: Service Confirmation
3-1 Create a service confirmation with reference to a service order
3-1-1 Create a follow-up service confirmation from your service order..
Open your service process.
SAP menu→ Service→ Maintain Service Process
Choose Open Business Transaction (the folder icon).
Enter your service process transaction number. Enter .
Your service order will display.
Choose the icon Create Follow Up Transaction.
Service Confirmation→ Confirmation
3-1-2 Copy all the line items into the confirmation.
Select both items.
Choose Copy
The Overview tab will show the transferred items.
3-1-3 Enter Service technician Lou Windham.
Choose the button Fast Entry.
In the confirmation header area, in the Exec.Service Employee field, delete the
current entry and enter Windham.
Field Name or Data Type Values
Service Employee 400440
Enter
3-1-4 Mark the confirmation complete and save your confirmation.
Choose Complete..
Choose Save.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 286/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-128
Transaction number: see system message ______________________
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 287/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-129
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 288/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-130
Solutions
Unit: Service Order Management
Topic: R/3 Integration
4-1 Integration with R/3
The confirmations have created time data records in the cross application time sheet(CATS). A supervisor would review the time records for the technicians’ work and then
(because you have not set up automatic transfer to accounting) the supervisor would initiatethe transfer of the data. In this exercise, you will perform these supervisory functions.
In addition, in R/3 you want to view the material goods movements that were created by
the confirmation for the parts used from the technician’s van stock.4-1-1 CATS Integration
Log into the R/3 system. Your instructor will give you the user name and
password.
Menu path: SAP Menu → Human Resources → Time Management → Time
Sheet → Transfer → Accounting (CAT7)
Enter the HR employee number for Lou Windham 10451.
Execute (F8) and the cost information will transfer to accounting.
4-1-2 Stock Overview
Menu path: SAP Menu→ Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory
Management → Environment → Stock → Stock Overview (MMBE)
Enter the material R-1130 and choose Execute (F8)
You receive a stock overview for all plants and storage locations.
Choose the line with 1500 VAN 1: Windham
Use the menu path at the top: Environment → Material Movements
to view the material document list for material R-1130.
The materials movement will reference the internal order associated with yourservice process.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 289/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-131
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 290/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-132
Solutions
Unit: Service Order Management
Topic: Service Billing
5-1 Create a billing document
5-1-1 In the CRM system, use the menu path:
SAP Menu → Service → Billing → Maintain Billing Due List.
Enter your confirmation document number and choose Edit (F8)
Expand the transactions to see what is billed.
Select all transactions and choose Individual Billing .
Save the billing documents.
5-1-2 Display the billing documents.
SAP Menu → Service → Billing → Maintain Billing Documents.
Enter your ##Megastore business partner number in the Payer field..
Choose Maintain Billing Documents
Check accounting integration of the billing document by the following steps:
Mark one item and select the Display Document Flow button.
Mark invoice and select the Display Accounting Documents button.
You receive a list with all relevant accounting documents.
With a double click , you can jump directly to the accounting documents.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 291/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-133
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 292/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-134
Solutions
Unit: Service Order Management
Topic: Service Controlling
6-1 Display order result
In the R/3 system use the menu path:
SAP Menu → Accounting → Controlling → Internal Orders → Master Data → Special
Functions → Order → Display
6-1-1 Display the internal orders that have been generated from your service process and
your service confirmation.
Use the F4 help to search your internal order. Use the search Internal OrderCreated by CRM Service. Enter your service order number as search criteria
Choose the internal order by double clicking.
Enter .
6-1-2 Call up the cost analysis by using the menu path Extras → Cost Analysis.
Compare actual and planned costs and revenues.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 293/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 294/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-136
Exercises
Unit: Product Service Letter Management
Topic: Create a Product Service Letter
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Create a Product Service Letter (PSL)
• Create Service Order Items based on PSL’s
Since this was the 34th
repair ticket the technician has received
for the same LCD problem over the past few weeks, he decides to
discuss the issue with some of the other Service Technicians whohave worked on the problem. After a number of discussions with
his colleagues as well as with the Manufacturer, the technician
concludes that this is a manufacturing defect and that all
remaining stock needs to be cleared off the shelves. Also,customers who have purchased the Notebook Professional 17 in
the past 6 months need to be notified of the problem. He uses the
Product Service Letter to identify who these customers are via theRegistered Product Number (Individual Object) and then to create
an automatic service order for follow-up with these customers.
1-1 Create a product service letter.
1-1-1 Create a new PSL with the transaction type: SAP Product Serv. Letter.
1-1-2 Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Name Description
Bill-To Party US Service (400410) Description ##LCD Display
Priority Medium
1-2 Identify the product and ID type that are the subject of the product service letter.
1-2-1 Enter the information.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 295/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-137
Field Name or Data Name Description
Product-ID HT-1011
ID Type Product ID
1-2-2 Release the PSL.
1-2-3 Enter an action at the header level.
Add the action PSL_CREATE_ITEMS . The action is automatically processed.Check the status.
1-2-4 Select the Relationships tab and enter the Service Template transaction number :200270.
1-2-5 Return to the item level to select the line items containing the Product ID’s
(Individual Objects).
1-2-6 Add the action PSL_CREATE_SO_ITEM on item level.
1-2-7 Save your PSL.
1-2-8 Check the Document Flow to view the service order that was just created for aline item.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 296/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-138
Solution
Unit: Product Service Letter Management
Topic: Create PSL
Since this was the 34th
repair ticket the technician has received for the same LCD problem over the
past few weeks, he decides to discuss the issue with some of the other Service Technicians whohave worked on the problem. After a number of discussions with his colleagues as well as with the
Manufacturer, the technician concludes that this is a manufacturing defect and that all remaining
stock needs to be cleared off the shelves as well as all customers who have purchased the Notebook Professional 17 in the past 6 months need to be notified of the problem. He uses the
Product Service Letter to identify who these customers are via the Registered Product Number
(Individual Object) and then to create an automatic service order for follow-up with thesecustomers.
1-1 Create a new product service letter.
Log into the Enterprise Portal with the user provided by your trainer.
Top level navigation: Service and Support→ Product Service Letter .
1-1-1 Create a new PSL with the transaction type: SAP Product Serv. Letter
Select the Create button.Choose the transaction type: SAP Product Service Letter .
1-1-2 Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Bill-To Party US Service (400410)
Description ##LCD Display
Priority Medium
1-2 Identify the product and ID type that are the subject of the product service letter. Choose
the Objects tab and select the Add Entry button.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 297/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 298/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-140
Choose the Document Flow tab to view the service orders created for the line items.
To notify the customers of the recall, you could create a letter via a form that istriggered by an action in the service order when it is initially created.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 299/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-141
Management Solution
Unit: Product Service Letter Management
Topic: Create PSL
Since this was the 34th
repair ticket the technician has received for the same LCD problem over the
past few weeks, he decides to discuss the issue with some of the other Service Technicians whohave worked on the problem. After a number of discussions with his colleagues as well as with the
Manufacturer, the technician concludes that this is a manufacturing defect and that all remaining
stock needs to be cleared off the shelves as well as all customers who have purchased the Notebook Professional 17 in the past 6 months need to be notified of the problem. He uses the
Product Service Letter to identify who these customers are via the Registered Product Number
(Individual Object) and then to create an automatic service order for follow-up with thesecustomers.
1-2 Create a new product service letter.
In the CRM system, use the menu path: SAP Menu→ Service→ Maintain Product
Service Letters
1-1-2 Create a new PSL with the transaction type: SAP Product Serv. Letter
From the menu choose Business Transaction→
Create Choose the transaction type:SAP Product Service Letter .
1-1-2 Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Bill-To Party US Service (400410)
Description ##LCD Display
Priority Medium
1-2 Identify the product and ID type that are the subject of the product service letter.
1-2-1 Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 300/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-142
Product-ID HT-1011
ID Type (Dropdown box) Product ID
You can specify a range if you so choose, but for purposes of this exercise, you will
leave these fields blank.
1-2-2 Release the PSL.
At the header level, change the status from Open to Released using the dropdown
menu.
1-2-3 Enter an action at the header level.
Go to Transaction Data
Choose the dropdown to choose the action PSL_CREATE_ITEMS.
All Product ID’s (Individual Objects) associated with the product HT-1011 will be
gathered up and listed on the Item Details.. Select Item Details to view all theProduct ID’s associated with the product HT-1011.
1-2-4 Add a template which will contain the repair steps for the service orders generated.
Return to Transaction Data.
Select the Relationships tab and enter the Service Template transaction number:200270.
The template is used to automatically copy in data to service orders. In the next
steps, we will trigger an action that will automatically create service orders for each
of the Product ID’s in the service letter and in these generated service orders, thedata from the template will automatically be copied in.
1-2-5 Return to the Item Details and select the line items containing the Product ID’s
(Individual Objects).
1-2-6 Go to the Actions tab on the item level and add the action PSL_CREATE_SO_ITEM. With this action, at the time of save, a service order will
be created immediately and the status of the line item is changed to Processed.
1-2-7 Save your PSL.
Choose Save.
1-2-8 Check Document flow to view the service order that was just created.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 301/494
© SAP AG CR700 5-143
Choose the Document Flow icon to view the service orders created for the line
items. To notify the customers of the recall, you could create a letter via a form thatis triggered by an action in the service order when it is initially created.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 302/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-1
SAP AG 2004
Complaints and Returns
6. Complaints and Returns
7. In-House Repair
8. Enterprise Intelligence
9. E-Service
10. Service Analytics
Appendix
1. Overview of CRM Service
2. Installed Base; Individual
Object
3. Service Contract & Entitlement
4. Planned Services
5. Service Order Management
Day 3
Day 1 Day 2
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 303/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-2
SAP AG 2004
Complaints and Returns
Processing
Case Management
Complaints and Returns
Customizing
Complaints and Returns
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 304/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-3
SAP AG 2004
At the conclusion of this unit you will be able to:
Describe the options of complaints handling
Describe the options of returns processing
Perform the customizing settings for complaints and returns
Complaints and Returns: Unit Objectives
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 305/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-4
SAP AG 2004
Complaints and Returns: Business Scenario
Today’s customer is more educated and demanding.The customer expects appropriate action if there are
defective products or deficient services.
Companies with a high volume of returns or
complaints and a low staff-customer ratio require an
intelligent and effective service and support system
for automatic and optimal processing of
information.
Customers use the Internet, telephone, e-mail, or fax
to report that they are not satisfied with the goods
or services they have received.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 306/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-5
SAP AG 2004
Complaints and Returns Processing: TopicObjectives
At the conclusion of this topic you will be able to:
Create and process complaints
Create and process returns
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 307/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-6
SAP AG 2004
Complaint
When a customer has issues with a material or service provided
Complaint
When a customer has issues with a material or service provided
Return
When a customer wishes to return a material he has received
Return
When a customer wishes to return a material he has received
Two documents to handle customer satisfaction
Both documents provide:
Easy entry to document defects and causes
Flexible process definition and control
Actions that can be chosen or set to occur automatically
Tracking and reporting
Integration with controlling, Interaction center and mySAP Business Intelligence
Complaints and Returns
Features of the Complaint and Return documents: Automatic business partner determination and data display
Catalog types allowing flexible definition of information for capture and analysis
Reason for rejection and reason for complaint
Linking of attachments, such as Microsoft Office documents for full details
Actions can occur automatically or can be triggered by the user clicking a pushbutton to launch follow-
on documents to handle sending a replacement, creating a return, creating a credit memo, and specifying
other logical next steps.
Integrated with the Interaction Center so that an agent can quickly view prior transactions with
customers, create complaints or replacements as follow-on transactions, and view status of outstanding
complaints.
When the documents are saved, information from the complaint or return is transferred to the SAP
Business Information Warehouse.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 308/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 309/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-8
SAP AG 2004
Complaints and Returns Management
Create complaintfor product and
service
44
22
33
55
11
66
Return defective
product
Complaints and Returns
Management
Create substitute
delivery
Create credit
memo for
service
Analyze complaint
reasons and success
of actions taken
Check customer
satisfaction
The customer calls the service organization to complain about a service performed and a defective product that was delivered.
The customer sends in the defective product using the return material authorization number issued.
A service employee performs a technical analysis and decides that the customer should be given a
replacement for the defective product.
The service employee also decides that the customer should be compensated with a credit for the
incomplete service performed.
Using predefined queries and reports, the service manager analyzes complaint reasons and decides what
actions should be taken to prevent further complaints and checks whether the actions taken and product
changes were successful.
The agent calls the customer to ensure that the customer is satisfied.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 310/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-9
SAP AG 2004
Complaints Process
Complaint
item
Return
request
Credit/debit
request
Spare part
delivery
Customer-specificactions
Sub-Items
CRM document
SAP R/3
CRM
Billing
Complaint
Task
Main-Items
Sub-items Sub-items are assigned to a superordinate item
Sub-items trigger follow-up documents:
- SAP R/3 documents
Return request
Substitute delivery
- CRM Billing documents
Credit memo
Debit memo
Sub-items can be created by actions triggered either manually or by the system, based on predefined
planning and start conditions.
Activities can be contacts or tasks. Task is 1003.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 311/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-10
SAP AG 2004
Specific Complaint Functions
Complaint
With or without reference to a product sold or a service performed
Standard actions delivered: credit memo, debit memo, substitutedelivery, return request
Data that can be maintained:
Reference document
Business partner
Reference object
Product sold or service performed
Quantity
Complaint reason and description
You can create complaints and returns directly from the items in a sales or service transaction. Thissimplifies the creation of complaints because all data (for example, partners, products, quantities and
prices) is transferred from the line item.
Complaints and returns processing is integrated with Action Management. You can define business
specific actions (for example, credit or debit memos) that should be triggered by a complaint.
Complaints enable follow-on processes, such as stock posting to be triggered automatically.
Catalogs can be defined with damage codes, which speed the entry of complaints and enables statistical
evaluation. Integration with SAP Business Information Warehouse enables you to create statistics for
evaluation purposes (such as how many complaints reference a particular product).
Users can follow the processing of complaints or returns using status, which gives them information at
every step.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 312/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-11
SAP AG 2004
Complaint and Return Functions
Reference Documents
Reference Objects
Warranty Determination
Quantity Check
Return Material Authorization
Reference Documents You can create a complaint/return with or without reference to a CRM document, for example, a sales
order, service order, or billing document.
You can create a reference to any document residing in an integrated system, for example, billing or
delivery documents in SAP R/3.
The selected items from the reference document are copied into the complaint/return document
according to the defined copying rules.
You can add information to an existing complaint document by creating a reference to one or more
documents. You can also create a reference on item level.
Reference Objects
In complaints and returns, you can provide additional information about the product or service that is
the subject of the complaint by creating a reference to objects from a header or item.
You can create a reference to products, installed bases (IBases) and their components, or individualobjects.
Information about the relationship between a product and an IBase enables you, for example, to
analyze complaints to identify problems that are dependent on the IBase in which a product is
installed.
Warranty Check
An automatic check determines whether a warranty exists for customer-specific objects.
You can use warranty information to make decisions about the subsequent actions that need to be
taken. For example, you might want the system to automatically create a return item if a warranty
exists.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 313/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-12
The warranty check is based on:
- Maintained warranty conditions for the individual object or installed base component
- Manually maintained delivery date
Quantity check
An automatic check prevents the entry of complaints for more products or services than have actually
been sold to a customer.
For new complaint or return items, the system also displays the maximum quantity of a product or
service that can be entered. You can define whether the user should get an error or information message when increasing the
maximum quantity displayed.
Prerequisite is a reference to a service order, sales order, or billing document.
Return material authorization (RMA)
Each return process requires:
- An authorization check for returning a sold product
- A unique RMA number for the return delivery
Authorization checking is supported by a warranty check and a reference to an existing CRM sales
order.
The unique CRM complaint/return number, which is also available in SAP R/3, supports the RMA
number.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 314/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-13
SAP AG 2004
Standard Actions
Create return request
An SAP R/3 return request is created forgoods receipt processing.
Create spare part delivery
An SAP R/3 delivery document is created
and managed in the delivery list.
Create credit/debit memo request
The credit/debit memo request is transferred to the CRM Billing
credit/debit request is created. It appears in the billing list.
Create task
A CRM task is created and appears in the task list of the
responsible employee.
Credit Memos and Debit Memos are created within CRM Billing. Both mass controlling and individual controlling scenarios are available for the service process (starting
with SAP R/3 Release 4.6B). Only mass controlling is supported for the sales process.
When credit memos are generated, the relevant controlling objects are created.
During mass controlling, the corresponding profitability segment is determined using the
characteristics of the sales or service process.
During individual controlling, the corresponding internal order is determined using the characteristics
of the service process.
Returns Requests automatically create a return sales order within R/3. The number of the R/3 sales order
and the number of the CRM return is the same. The goods receipt can be posted subsequently to this
return order. In addition, when a returns request is created, accounts receivables are posted in the SAP
R/3 FI component and the controlling object is also posted.
Spare parts delivery automatically creates a sales order in the SAP R/3 SCM component to which adelivery and goods issue can be posted. The sales order contains the same number and item category as
the complaint document in CRM.
R/3 has two new document types, CRMC and CRMR, which correspond to transaction types in CRM.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 315/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-14
SAP AG 2004
Returns Process
Return
itemCredit/debit
request
Spare part
delivery
Customer-specificactions
Sub-items CRM document
SAP R/3
CRM
Billing
Return
Task
The process begins when returned goods are received or a customer asks to return goods. The employee creates a return in the CRM system. This can be done with or without reference to an
existing document. A returns item can be made by copying from the preceding document.
Customer data is entered at the header and additional business partners are determined using partner
determination.
A returns order is generated in the R/3 system when a returns item is created in the CRM system. The
number of the R/3 sales order and the number of the CRM return is the same. A goods receipt can be
posted in SAP R/3 to this R/3 order.
As with the complaint, an employee enters a reason from predefined codes.
Activities can be triggered such as a credit memo, a spare parts delivery, or a customer-specific action.
A credit memo transfers billing relevant items to CRM Billing.
A spare part delivery sales order is created in the SAP R/3 SCM component if spare part delivery is
chosen. Employees can also create tasks which may be assigned to another employee to complete.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 316/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-15
SAP AG 2004
Specific Return Functions
Return
With reference to a product sold
Return item automatically triggers creation of return request in
SAP R/3 SD
Standard actions delivered: credit memo, debit memo, substitute
deliveries
Data that can be maintained:
Reference document
Business partner
Product sold
Quantity
Return reason
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 317/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-16
SAP AG 2004
Case Management: Topic Objectives
At the conclusion of this topic you will be able to:
Explain the concept of mySAP CRM Case Management, whichprocess complex and related problems or issues that extend
beyond individual documents, transactions, or business
partners
Explain how cases enable you to consolidate and manage
diverse information about a problem or issue in a central
repository, and to track and analyze this information
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 318/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-17
SAP AG 2004
Case Management
Case Management
Provides a central repository for managing
common information originating from multiple
sources and channels
Enables global exchange of information by
ensuring that all parties involved with a case have
access to the same information simultaneously
Supports the processing of linked cases together,
thus allowing a high volume of data resulting in a
lower cost per customer treatment
To have a comprehensive and in-depth history of the case To efficiently identify and react to customer needs
To build customer loyalty
To provide your organization with greater visibility of case information resulting in an improved
processing efficiency
Being an open solution, it supports the linking of objects from different applications, such as SAP CRM
and SAP R/3, as well as objects from external applications
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 319/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-18
SAP AG 2004
Case Management in mySAP CRM
Create case
7744
22
33
55
11
66
Create case
hierarchy
Process case
Close case
Create service
confirmation
Perform
analysis of
case
Perform billing
The contact center agent processes several business transactions relating to a common issue. An alertinforms the agent to create a case to manage all the information together. The case is assigned to a case
processor.
The case processor reviews the case history and assigns a team of people to work on the case by creating
activities to be fulfilled by the team. Additionally, a case note is added instructing the team to link all
electronic forms to the case. A security level of confidentiality is assigned to the case.
While reviewing the case log, the case processor identifies another case related to the current case and
links this case to the current case as a sub-case.
The case processor creates a service confirmation to enter time and expenses associated with the case.
The case processor closes the case after having ensured that all activities, linked business transactions,
and sub-cases have been processed and closed.
Billing of time and expenses for the case.
Using predefined queries and reports, the service manager performs case analyses to maintain visibilityof case processes within his or her reach of responsibility.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 320/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 321/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-20
SAP AG 2004
Case Management Features II
Linking of products
Maintaining an ongoing notes log
Tracking of changes
Authorizations
Case-specific analytical information
Alerts
Scripting
Case classification
Copying of cases
Linking of products – supports the linking of an existing Installed Base component, individual object,and product to the case
Maintaining an ongoing notes log to capture case-relevant information; case notes are user, date, and
time stamped and can be further specified through case note types
Tracking of changes as part of the case history through visibility of an audit trail of changes applied to
the case. The changes are user, date, and time stamped
Authorizations restricting viewing and editing capabilities based on case types and case note types. In
addition, it is possible to restrict user access to specific information within an authorized case type.
Case-specific analytical information to support the visibility of case characteristics for ease of search,
selection, and processing
Alerts to support event-triggered alert mechanisms, such as overdue case tasks
Scripting – intelligent guidance tool that provides case instructions for the less experienced user
Case classification – enables the grouping of cases for search, reporting and analysis reasons by definingadditional attributes that are saved with the case
Copying of cases – creation of a new case by copying an existing case with the ability to predefine which
data gets copied to the new case
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 322/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-21
SAP AG 2004
Complaints and Returns Customizing:Topic Objectives
At the conclusion of this topic you will be able to:
Perform the customizing settings for complaints and returns
Describe how to customize actions
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 323/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-22
SAP AG 2004
Complaints and Returns: Customizing
Standard transaction types:
CRMC – Complaints
CRMR – Returns
TSC – Sales Complaints
Standard item categories:
COMP – Complaint
G2N – Credit Memo
L2N – Debit Memo
TANN – Free of Charge Subsequent Delivery
CRMR – Returns
Item category determination for sub-items
The item category for the subitems is determined by the transaction type, the item category group (fromthe product master), the usage (from the action definition), and the main item category.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 324/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-23
SAP AG 2004
Processing Medium Methods
Workflow
Smart Form
You can set up actions in Customizing
according to the demands of yourcompany’s processes.
Actions can schedule and start follow-on processing
steps, depending on transaction type and different
schedule and start conditions.
Action profiles control this process.
Customizing Actions
activeactive
inactiveinactive
Start Condition
Action ProfileAction Profile
ActionAction
Schedule
Condition
Schedule
Automatically
Schedule
AutomaticallyAction ListAction List
F4 (manually)F4 (manually)
Toolbar (manually)Toolbar (manually)
Processing Time immediately
when saving
selection report
yes
no
fulfilled
fulfilled
In Action customizing, you can do the following: Create an action profile with action definitions
Define the attributes of the actions in the action definitions, such as the processing time or whether the
action may be changed in the document
Define conditions (schedule and start conditions) for action types
Assign the action profile to the relevant transaction type and item category
Action profiles COMPLAINT and COMPLAINT_ITEM are delivered by SAP. If they do not meet your
requirements, you can define your own actions.
COMPLAINT is assigned to transaction type CRMC for complaints, COMPLAINT_ITEM is assigned to
item category COMP .
A Wizard in Customizing helps you create action profiles and actions.
You can define labels and icons for the pushbuttons for each action within an action profile. At this
point, you can create pushbuttons only for actions to occur at the item level.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 325/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-24
SAP AG 2004
Condition:Condition:Action:Action:
Set quotation to
be completed
Validity period expired
Create follow-up
activity, e.g., phone
call
Two weeks before
contract end
Create follow-up
contractTarget value reached
Send printed order
confirmation
Quotation
Contract
Order Order complete and
without errors
Examples for Actions
Actions use the Post Processing Framework (PPF), a Basis component, which can be automated with theinitiation of outputs, follow-on documents or workflows.
Using the Actions tab page within a business document, you can display a list of actions that can be
included in the business transaction.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 326/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-25
SAP AG 2004
Subject Profile
The subject profile groups the catalog types and the valid code groups
The subject profile contains the hierarchy of the assigned catalogs
The subject profile is assigned to the transaction type
Customizing Catalogs
SubjectSubject
Return ReasonReturn Reason
CauseCause
TaskTask
Steps for setting up catalog customizing: Define the relevant catalog types
Define codes and code groups
Define the code group profiles
Define the subject profiles
Assign the subject profile to the transaction type
A defect class is assigned in Customizing for each code in code groups of the Damage/Reason catalog
type. When defining a defect class, you decide whether or not a defect of this class will be flagged as a
quality defect.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 327/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-26
SAP AG 2004
Billing types:
G2 – Credit Memo
L2 – Debit Memo
Item categories for billing:
G2N – Credit Memo Item
L2N – Debit Memo Item
Item category determination
Customizing for Billing
A billing type specifies the characteristics and properties of a billing document (an invoice, credit memoor debit memo, for example). The billing type attributes determine how the system behaves during the
billing process.
The item category determines the properties and characteristics of billing due list items and billing items
(normal service items, and credit/debit memo items, for example). The item category attributes
determine how the system behaves during Input Processing and Billing.
The Item Category Determination service is used to define the item category for CRM Billing from
data on CRM business transactions. There are two possible ways of doing this:
You can assign the item category for CRM Billing to a specific combination of transaction type and an
item category of the relevant CRM business transaction.
If the standard setting above is not sufficient for your business scenario, you can use Advanced Item
Category determination to determine the item category for CRM Billing more flexibly.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 328/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 329/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 330/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-29
Exercises
Unit: Complaints and Returns
Topic: Complaints and Returns Processing
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Create and process complaints documents
• Create and process returns documents
Customers are complaining about products and services they
received from our company. You would like to create different
business transactions to document complaints and trigger follow-up transactions.
1-1 To create a new complaint as follow-up document, refer to the created service order in the
exercise Service Order Management- Service Quotation.
1-1-1 Create a new complaint.
Choose Create.
Choose the transaction type: Complaints.
Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description or Value
Sold-To Party ##MEGASTORE
Description Complaint ##
Priority Very High
To confirm your entries, choose Enter.
If you receive a pop-up with contact persons, please choose one.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 331/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-30
Enter the following data for the product:
Field Name or Data Type Description or Value
Product R-1130
Quantity 1
To confirm your entries, select Enter.
2-1 Create sub item Return Request.
Create a return request as sub-item using the action functionality on item level.
2-2 Create the sub item Credit Memo.
Create a credit memo as sub-item using the action functionality on item level.
Save your business transaction.Make a note of the business transaction number of your returns.
2-3 R/3 Integration
2-3-1 Create Returns Delivery.
Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description or Value
Shipping Point 3800
Order Business Transaction Number ofyour Complaint
Post the goods receipt.
2-3-2 Stock Overview
Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description or Value
Material R-1130
Plant 3800
Choose Execute.
Mark with the cursor 3800 Atlanta and choose. Details.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 332/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-31
Under Stock Type, you see that the system has added your returns request.
2-4 Billing credit memo
2-4-1 Release List for Billing
In order to bill your credit memo you have to use the billing engine application.
Enter your transaction number of your complaint and choose Execute.
Select the transaction number of your complaint and choose Release.
2-4-2 Maintain billing due list
Enter the transaction number of your complaint and choose Execute.
Select your transaction and choose Individual Billing .
Choose Save.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 333/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-32
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 334/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-33
Solutions
Unit: Complaints and Returns
Topic: Complaints and Returns Processing
2-1 Create a Complaint.
Log on to the Enterprise Portal with a user name (provided by your trainer).
In the Top Level Navigation bar, choose Service & Support → Complaints.
1-1-1 Create a new complaint.
Choose Create.
Choose the transaction type: Complaints
Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description or Value
Sold-To Party ##MEGASTORE
Description Complaint ##
Priority Very High
To confirm your entries, choose Enter.
If you receive a pop-up with contact persons, please choose a contact person.
If you receive an additional pop-up for the contact person address, please choose
and address.
In the Product tab, choose Add Entry.
Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description or Value
Product R-1130
Quantity 1
To confirm your entries, select Enter.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 335/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-34
2-1 Create a Return Request to send back the item.
Create a return request as sub-item using the action functionality on item level.
Go to the Scheduled Action tab on item level.Choose Add .
Select Returns Request
2-2 Create a Credit Memo line item to refund the customer..
Create a credit memo as sub item using the action function on item level.
Choose Scheduled Actions.
Choose Add .
Select Credit MemoSave.
2-3 When the customer returns the item, a returns delivery will be created.
2-3-1 Create Returns Delivery
In the Top Level Navigation bar, choose R/3 Integration → Create Outbound
Delivery.
Even though the screen shows the Outbound Delivery header, the line item iscreated as a returned item.
Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description or Value
Shipping Point 3800
Order Business Transaction Number of your
Complaint
Choose Enter .
Choose Post goods issue. (which will do a post goods receipt).
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 336/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-35
2-3-2 Stock Overview
In the Top Level Navigation, choose R/3 Integration → Stock Overview R/3.
Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description or Value
Material R-1130
Plant 3800
Choose Execute.
Double click on the line with plant 3800.
Under Stock Type, you see the Returns line showing that the system has added your
returns request.
2-4 Billing credit memo2-4-1 Release List for Billing
In order to bill your credit memo you have to use the billing engine application.
Choose IDES → Billing
In the Detailed Navigation Area, choose Release List for billing .
In the dialog-box, select CRMB.
Enter your transaction number of your complaint and choose Execute.
Select the transaction number of your complaint and choose Release.
2-4-2 Maintain billing due list
In the Top Level Navigation, choose IDES → Billing
In the Detailed Navigation Area, choose Maintain billing due list .
In the dialog-box, double click on CRMB.
Enter the transaction number of your complaint and choose Execute.
Select your transaction and choose Individual Billing .
Choose Save.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 337/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 338/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-37
Solutions
Unit: Complaints and Returns
Topic: Complaints and Returns Processing
3-1 Create a Complaint.
In your CRM system, use the menu path:
SAP Menu → Service → Maintain Complaints and In-House Repairs
1-1-1 Create a new complaint.
From the menu at the top of the screen, choose Business Transaction → Create.
Choose the transaction type: Complaints
Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description or Value
Sold-To Party ##MEGASTORE
Description Complaint ##
Priority Very High
To confirm your entries, choose Enter.
If you receive a pop-up with contact persons, please choose a contact person.
If you receive an additional pop-up for the contact person address, please choose
and address.
Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description or Value
Product R-1130
Quantity 1
To confirm your entries, select Enter.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 339/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-38
2-1 Create a Return Request line item to send back the item.
Create a return request as sub-item using the action functionality on item level.
Choose the button Returns Request
2-2 Create a Credit Memo line item to refund the customer..Create a credit memo as sub item using the action function on item level.
Choose the button Credit Memo
If you wish, you can view both of your newly created line items on the Item Details Screen.
Save.
2-3 When the customer returns the item, a returns delivery will be created.
2-3-1 Create Returns Delivery
Log onto the R/3 system using the user your instructor has given you.
SAP Menu → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation → Outbound
Delivery → Create Single Document with reference to sales order (VL01N)
Even though the screen shows the Outbound Delivery header, the line item is
created as a returns item.
Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description or Value
Shipping Point 3800
Order Business Transaction
Number of yourComplaint
Choose Enter .
Choose Post goods issue. (which will do a post goods receipt).
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 340/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-39
2-3-2 Stock Overview
In the R/3 system, use the following menu path:
SAP Menu → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment →
Stock → Stock Overview (MMBE) Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description or Value
Material R-1130
Plant 3800
Choose Execute.
Double click on the line with plant 3800.
Under Stock Type, you see the Returns line showing that the system has added yourreturns request.
2-4 Billing credit memo
2-4-1 Release List for Billing
In order to bill your credit memo you have to use the billing engine application in
CRM..
In the CRM system, choose the menu path:
SAP Menu→ Service→ Billing→ Release Billing Due List
Enter your transaction number of your complaint and choose Execute.
Select the transaction number of your complaint and choose Release.
2-4-2 Maintain billing due list
In the CRM system, use the menu path:
SAP Menu → Service → Billing → Maintain Billing Due List
Enter the transaction number of your complaint and choose Execute.
Select your transaction and choose Individual Billing .
Choose Save.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 341/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-40
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 342/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-41
Exercises
Unit: Case Management
Topic: Create a Case
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Create a Case
• Create a Sub-Case
A contact center agent processes several business transactions relating the
component 3961. An alert informs the agent to create a case to manage allthe information together. The case is assigned to a case processor. The
case processor reviews the case history and assigns a team of people to
work on the case by creating activities to be fulfilled by the team.Additionally, a case note is added instructing the team to link all
electronic forms to the case.
1-1 Log on to the Enterprise Portal.
2-1 Create a case of the type Incident Tracking to track all the incidents that are occurring.
Enter the following information in your case:
Field Name or Data Type Description or Value
Description ## Megastore_Case
Priority Very high
Processor 400440 (Lou Windham)
2-1-1 Save the Case
3-1 Now you want to enter the case details.
3-1-1 Create a Case note with the text type Description and the language English..
3-1-2 Add the Business Partner ##Megastore to the case.
3-1-3 Maintain the reason why you linked this BP.
3-1-4 Add the installed base component 3961.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 343/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-42
4-1 Create a new activity for this case.
4-1-1 Create an activity of the type Contact .
Use the following information:
Field Name or Data Type Description or ValueStart Date and Time Today at 10:00
End Date and Time Today at 11:00
Activity Partner ##Megastore
Description Discuss issues withcomponents
Priority High
4-1-2 Attach a relevant document to the case. Browse for one you like.4-1-3 Add an existing Service Process to the case.
4-1-4 Save the Case.
4-2 Since the issues are more widespread than immediately thought, you will want to create a
new case to hold information on the case you just created as well as other future cases thatundoubtedly will occur.
4-2-1 Create a new case called ##Umbrella Case with Lou Windham as the processor.
4-2-2 Add your previously created case as a subcase.
4-2-3 Save your new case.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 344/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-43
Solution
Chapter: Case Management
Topic: Case
The contact center agent processes several business transactions relating the component 3961. Analert informs the agent to create a case to manage all the information together. The case is assigned
to a case processor. The case processor reviews the case history and assigns a team of people towork on the case by creating activities to be fulfilled by the team. Additionally, a case note is
added instructing the team to link all electronic forms to the case.
1-1 Log on to the Enterprise Portal with the user name provided by your trainer.
2-1 Create a case of the type Incident Tracking to track all the incidents that are occurring.
Navigate to Service & Support → Case Management.
Choose Create.
When the pop-up appears, choose Incident Tracking .
Enter the following information for your case:
Field Name or Data Entry Description
Header ## Megastore_Case
Priority Very high
Processor 400440 (Lou Windham)
Enter to confirm the data
2-1-1 Save the Case.
3-1 Now you want to enter the case details.
3-1-1 Create a case note to record information about the case
Case Notes tab.
Use the following settings in the drop down boxes:
Field Name or Data Entry Description
Text type Description
Language English
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 345/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-44
Enter whatever text you would like in the text box.
3-1-2 Add the Business Partner ##Megastore. to the case.
Business Partner tab
Add Entry
Use the dropdown in the Business partner field to search for ##Megastore .Choose
the business partner number for ##Megastore.
Enter
3-1-3 Maintain the reason why you linked this BP.
Enter a reason in the Link Reason field on the Business Partner tab
3-1-4 Add the Installed Base Component 3961.
Products tab
Add Entry
Field Name or Data Entry Description
Component 3961
Link Reason Repeated breakdowns
4-1 Create a new activity for this case.
4-1-1
Go to the Activities tab to create a new activity.Choose Create
Select the activity type Contact
Enter the following activity data:.
Field Name or Data Entry Description
Start Date and Time Today at 10:00
End Date and Time Today at 11:00
Activity Partner ##Megastore
Description Discuss Issues with components
Priority High
Enter
4-1-2 Attach a relevant document to the case.
Documents tab
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 346/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-45
Choose Add
Choose Browse to look for a document
Choose any document you like and give it a name.
Choose Add Document .
4-1-3 Add a Service Process to the case.
Go to the Linked Objects tab
Here you can see all the previously linked objects as well as categories for objectsthat can be added.
Find the entry for Service Order (It will be located under Business Transaction
and Service Process.)
Highlight the entry Service Order.
Choose Add Object
Enter a service process number or choose the dropdown search on the Object Key field to search for a service process.
Your selected order appears in the Linked Objects field under Service Order.
4-1-4 Save the Case.
4-2 Since the issues are more widespread than immediately thought, you will want to create a
new case to hold information on the case you just created as well as other future cases thatundoubtedly will occur.
4-2-1 Create a new case
Choose Create
Choose Incident Tracking
Field Name or Data Entry Description
Header ##Umbrella Case
Processor 400440 (Lou Windham)
Enter
4-2-2 Add your previously created case as a subcase.
Go to the Hierarchy tab
Add Entry
Choose the dropdown search on the Case ID field .
Search All Cases
Go
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 347/494
© SAP AG CR700 6-46
Choose your case.
See how it appears as a subitem.
4-2-3 Save your new case..
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 348/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 349/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-2
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair Processing
In-House Repair Customizing
In-House Repair
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 350/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-3
SAP AG 2004
At the conclusion of this unit you will be able to:
Describe the options of In-House Repair handling
Perform the customizing settings for In-House Repair
In-House Repair: Unit Objectives
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 351/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-4
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Business Scenario
Manage the whole in-house repair process –
from creation to cash:
Order Management - create in-house repair orders,check whether warranty exists, define repair steps
and assign an existing service contract.
Engagement Management – plan repair costs,
manage quotation, record time and spare
parts used, and bill the client.
Logistics Integration – monitor and check
availability of required service parts, delivered
products to be repaired, and delivered
temporary replacements.
Controlling Integration – plan repair costsand analyze costs and revenues resulting
from the repair.
Escalation Management – monitor and escalate
existing in-house repair orders based on relevant
service level agreements.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 352/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-5
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair
Analyze defect
reasons
Enter repair
request
77
44
22 33
55
11
88
66
Plan repair steps
Perform
confirmation
Send in defective
product
Create service
quotation
Create invoice Return repaired
product
The customer calls the service organization to request a repair. The agent enters the repair request. Thesystem checks whether a warranty exists.
The customer sends in the product using the given return material authorization number.
A service representative performs the technical analysis and enters the inspection result (causes, tasks,
etc.). He decides what action should be taken based on the inspection result.
The system calculates the price for the planned repair and required spare parts, according to the price
agreements in the service contract, and the warranty costs. The agent generates a service quotation.
The customer accepts the quotation. The service representative repairs the product and confirms his
working times and materials used. He also documents the inspection results.
The service representative returns the repaired product to the customer.
The service representative triggers customer billing, based on the confirmed time and spare parts used,
and in accordance with existing warranties and specific price agreements.
Using predefined queries and reports, the service manager analyzes the most important defect reasons.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 353/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-6
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Order Structure
The In-House repair order is a document that covers all
relevant data for the whole in-house repair process starting from a repair request for a defect product or equipment for
a customer
planning of required repair steps and spare parts
all required follow-up steps (scrapping, return request, loaner
management)
In-House
Repair
Header
Main-Item
Sub-Item
Header Data Information that is valid for the in-house repair order as a whole (for example, in-house repair order
number, status, description, priority, Sold-to Party)
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 354/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-7
SAP AG 2004
Sales Order
In-House Repair
Repair StepsRepair Steps
Spare PartsSpare Parts
ReturnRequest
Scrapping
Return repaired
product request
Loan device
request
Sub-Items
Repair Steps
SAP R/3
Loan device
request
Goods issue
Return item
(Inbound)
Return repaired
product item
(Outbound)
Loan device item
(Inbound)
Loan device
Item (Outbound)
Spare Parts
Resource Planning
Reservation
Repair Request
Item
In-House
Repair
Order
Main-Items
Main Item Data Contains information that is valid for specific in-house repair order item only (for example, the
product to be repaired, quantity, status, defect description, subject codes, counter reading ...)
Sub-item Data
Contains information that is valid for the superior main item only (for example, required repair steps,
required service parts, delivery requests for loaner issues, scrapping, …)
Sub-items can be created by triggering actions manually or by the system
Activities can be contacts or tasks. Task is 1003.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 355/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-8
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Item Hierarchy
Enables items within the service order, in-House repair order and
service confirmation to be structured in the form of a hierarchy Used to show, for example, that certain spare parts belong to a
service or that a service consists of several individual services items
When you create a service order, you link the individual items to form a hierarchy by entering thenumber of the superior item in the field Higher-Level Item. As soon as you have maintained an higher-
level item, an additional tab Item Hierarchy is displayed, where the item hierarchy is represented
graphically.
When values from sub-items are cumulated, this value is assigned to the higher-level item
Group conditions can be defined for pricing. They define whether the system should calculate data for
pricing from more than one document item.
Pricing conditions can either be duplicated in all assigned sub-items or applied to the cumulated value of
all assigned sub-items.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 356/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-9
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Request
Sales Order
Return Item
(Inbound)
SAP R/3Main-Item
Repair Request
Return Request
In-House
Repair
CRM
The customer reports (for example, to the Call Center) one or more
defect products. He wants to return the defect products within the context of a service
(for example, maintenance for monitors).
The agent enters the relevant information at header and main item
level
Business Partner Data
Reference Object
Product, quantity and defect description
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 357/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-10
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Goods Receipt
The customer records the RMA number on the delivery note.
When the returns arrived, the warehouse clerk
searches for the correct R/3 sales order,
creates the return delivery and
post the goods receipt.
The quantity is posted into the order-specific stock, that the same
repaired product can be returned.
Delivery
Goods Receipt
Main-Item
Repair Request
Return Request
In-House
Repair
CRM
Sales Order
Return Item
SAP R/3
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 358/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-11
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Diagnostic
Pos1Repair Request
Return Request
In-House Repair
CRM
Diagnostic
Repair step 1
Repair step 2
Spare Part 1
Inspection result
recording
Repair step
planning
The sub-item Diagnostic
shows that the defects of
the receipt goods should
be analyzed.
This sub-item is a service
item represented by a
service product (assigned
in customizing).
Sales Order
Return Item
SAP R/3
To record the result of the analysis you can Select the correct cause codes from a predefined damage /cause group.
- Codes can be entered both at header and item level to describe or categorize the service order
subject, such as:
Description (of problem, error, damage, ...)
Cause (of problem, ...)
Reason (for damage, rejection, complaint, inquiry, ...)
Location (of damage, …)
Codes, Catalogs and Profiles can be maintained in Customizing
BW analyses could be defined based on the codes entered in the service order
Enter the inspection results in a predefined and assigned inspection report.
Plan the required repair steps and required spare parts (Repair Step Planning).
Document usage decisions (scrapping, repair).
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 359/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-12
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Repair Step Planning
Service Contract Determination
The system automatically checks for each repair step and spare part
item whether service contracts exists for the customer.
Diagnostic
Repair step 1
Repair step 2
Spare Part 1
Repair step
planning
Relevant service contract information is visible from in-house repair order item referring to servicecontract.
Pricing
The system determines the prices for each repair item.
The different factors influencing pricing can include:
Spare parts and services included in the warranty
Customer-specific prices (discount)
Service contract-specific price agreements
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 360/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-13
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Quotation
In-House Repair Order
Step 1:Create an in-house
repair order with initial
status Quotation Quotation accepted
Item Cat. Status
Dismantle SRVQ Quotation
Quotation accepted
Item Cat. Status
Filter SRPQ Quotation
Step 2:Convert to status
Result: One single document
All pricing-relevant service items and spare part items get the status
Quotation. Quotations provide customers with information regarding prices
and terms of delivery before the actual in-house repair order items
are created
Accept quotation items: The status of quotation items can be converted from Quotation → Quotation accepted .
The service representative can start the repair.
Decline quotation items:
The status of quotation items can be converted from Quotation → Quotation declined.
The system should
Create the outbound delivery to return the not repaired product
Cancel the created spare part reservation in R/3
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 361/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-14
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Confirmation
Repair Request
Return
Request
In-House
Repair
Diagnostic
Repair step 1
Repair step 2
Spare Part 1
In-House Repair Order Service Confirmation
Diagnostic
Repair step 2
Spare Part 1
The confirmation is a follow-up document for the in-house repair order.
The service representative confirms
The time he spent for each planned and unplanned repair step
The spare parts he used to repair the product (planned and unplanned
spare parts)
The service representative can differentiate between Normal working hours and overtime (valuation type)
Experienced and not experienced working time (service type)
Warranty or free of charge items (accounting indicator)
Spare part items:
The system determines the correct in-house repair storage location.
Each spare part item updates the determined in-house repair stock and the existing reservation.
Repair step items:
Each time confirmation updates the Cross Application Time Sheet (CATS) in R/3 and at least the
assigned controlling object.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 362/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-15
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Delivery of Repaired Product
Repair
RequestReturn
Request
In-House
Repair
Diagnostic
Repair step 1
Repair step 2
Spare Part 1
CRM
In-House Repair OrderSAP R\3
Sales Order
Return Repaired
Product
Return
Request
Return Repaired
Product
The sub-item Return repaired product documents that the repaired
product can be returned to the customer. After saving the In-house repair order, this item is replicated into a sales
order item in R\3, where the outbound delivery process can start.
(Outbound delivery, packaging, goods issue, ...)
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 363/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-16
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: SAP R/3 Relevant Actions
Create Send in Repairs
SAP R/3 return request is created for goods receipt processing.
Create Repaired goods delivery
A SAP R/3 delivery document is created and managed in the delivery list
to return the repaired product to the customer.
Create Replacement (Loan Device Delivery)
A SAP R/3 delivery document is created and managed in the delivery list
to send a loan device to the customer.
Create Temporary Replacement Collection (Loan Device Pick-Up)
A SAP R/3 delivery document is created and managed in the delivery list
to pick up the loan device from the customer.
Create Scrapping
A SAP R/3 goods issue is triggered to update the in-house repair order
stock.
Actions Flexible definition of actions (standard and customer-specific actions)
Representation of recurring process steps
Assignment of actions at header, item or sub-item level
Standard actions are used to create sub-items
Two types of sub-item exist:
- R/3 relevant sub-items
Create an R/3 document
Trigger follow-up processes like inbound delivery processing or outbound delivery processing
- CRM relevant sub-items
Can be used for additional CRM processes like resource planning or confirmations
Manually triggered by user OR automatically triggered by planning and start conditions
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 364/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-17
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Basic Functions
Reference Objects
Contract determination
Warranty determination
Return Material Authorization
Reference Objects You can provide additional information about the product that is the subject of the repair by entering a
reference to objects.
The reference object can also be assigned at header level of the in-house repair order.
Information about the relationship between a product and an IBase enables you, for example, to
analyze In-house repair orders to identify problems that depend on the IBase in which a product is
installed.
Contract determination
Automatic check for valid service contracts from in-house repair order processing, based on
- Business partner, validity period, object list
- Product list and value/quantity limits
A service contract assignment affects the calculation of the delivery dates based on agreed SLA and
In-house repair order pricing. Warranty determination
An automatic check determines whether a warranty exists for the customer-specific objects
This information can be used to make decisions which subsequent actions have to be taken. For
example, if a warranty exists, the system should not create any invoices for the repair.
The warranty check is based on
- Maintained warranty conditions for the individual object or installed base component
- Manually maintained reference date
If a warranty exists, the system will copy the warranty data into all sub-items.
Return Material Authorization
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 365/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-18
The unique CRM in-house repair order number, which is also available in the R/3 system, supports the
unique RMA number
The customer receives an Return Material Authorization number, which is used to uniquely identify
the shipment.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 366/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-19
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Additional Functionality
Amount Allocation
Counters
Qualifications
Templates
Product Proposal
Amount Allocation You can use amount allocation to allocate the value of a billing document, or the value of individual
items in a service order to several invoice recipients or payers. You can make this allocation in the
order or in the confirmation, or in the amount allocation document itself, whereby allocation to the
respective follow-up document is copied as a default value but can still be changed.
Counters
Qualifications
Templates
Templates are predefined repair steps (services and spare parts, including default quantities).
Templates can be selected as sub-items during in-house repair order creation.
Product Proposal
Product proposals can be generated and selected as sub-items during in-house repair order creation.
The system determines the assigned services based on the product to be repaired, and offers a listwhere the user can select the required repair steps.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 367/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-20
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Logistics Integration
Availability Information
R/3 Reservation
Update Reservation and Spare Part Stock
Integration of Loan Device Processing
Availability Information The user can see ATP information for all selected spare part items against SAP R/3.
The delivers the available quantity and earliest availability date. This information is based on the SAP
R/3 settings.
After saving the In-house repair order, the ATP information is deleted.
The relevant ATP plant for In-house repair orders is defined in Customizing.
Reservation
After saving the In-house repair order, the system creates an SAP R/3 reservation in the In-house
repair service plant for all spare part items.
These demands can now trigger the purchasing processing.
A spare part confirmation updates the existing reservation and stock in SAP R/3.
Loan Device Handling
For each repair item, you have the option of sending a loan device to your customer, thereby bridginglong repair times. The repair order manages the loan devices.
Delivery-relevant Sub-items
All delivery-relevant sub-items are replicated into SAP R/3 sales order items.
A delivery is created for each item and the goods receipt for inbound deliveries and a good issue for
outbound deliveries is posted.
For example
“Send in product to repair”
“Return repaired product”
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 368/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-21
„Loan device delivery / Loan device pick up“
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 369/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-22
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Customizing
Standard transaction types:
REPA – In-House Repair
Standard item categories:
RREQ – Repair Request
Item category determination for sub-items
RSUB – Send in Repair (Inbound)
RRET – Delivery Repair (Outbound)
DGNS – Diagnosis
LOAN – Send Replacement (Outbound)
LRET – Replacement (Inbound)
SCRP – Scrapping
SRVP – Repair Step
SRVM – Spare Part
The item category for the subitems is determined by the transaction type, the item category group (fromthe product master), the usage (from the action definition), and the main item category.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 370/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-23
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Unit Summary
You are now able to:
Describe the options of In-House Repair handling
Perform the customizing settings for In-House Repair
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 371/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-24
Exercises
Unit: In-House Repair
Topic: In-House Repair
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Create and maintain In-House Repair documents
In-House Repair, processing provides you with a wide range of
functions for managing all the necessary activities, which repairinggoods for a customer entails, from registering the repair request from
the customer through to billing the customer for the services performed. The process is fully integrated into R/3 logistics.
In this exercise, the service department receives a repair request froma customer. The customer sends a notebook with bad display to the
service department for repair. After the product sent in for repair is
received, a service technician performs a technical analysis andenters the inspection result.
The service technician plans the necessary repair services and spare
parts. After completion of the repair, the technician reports working
time and material used.
The repaired product is returned to the customer and a return deliveryof the loan devices is triggered.
1-1 The following process flow will give you an overview of all possible process steps that can be performed.
• Order: Repair request and send in repair
• Logistic: Return for repair
• Order: Technical analysis and subsequent actions (repair and temporary replacement)
• Logistic: Loan device delivery
• Repair completion confirmation
• Order: Return delivery for the repair
• Logistic: Return delivery for the repair
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 372/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-25
1-2 Order: Repair request and send in repairs
The customer informs you that he has a notebook with bad display (horizontal lines in the
display) that he would like you to repair.
You record the details of the customer's repair request (reference object; kind of damage)as the main item in a repair order.
You create a return item which shows that an inbound delivery is expected for the
notebook. The unique RMA number (Return Material Authorization) is made up of the
unique number of the In-House repair order and the item number of the returns item. Thecustomer uses the RMA number to send the defective product in for repair.
1-2-1 Create In-House Repair document of type SAP Repairs.
Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type DescriptionSold-To Party ##MEGASTORE
Description In-House Repair ##
Priority Very High
Enter the product HT-1011 with quantity 1
If the system proposes the assignment of a service contract, choose No assignment .
Enter Component 3305 as a reference object.
Do not assign a contract.
The system informs you if the object is under warranty. Look in the message list.
Enter the reason for the complaint:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Reason for Complaint Malfunction in LCD display
1-2-2
Creation of Send in Repair Creates a sub item of category Return for repair for the main repair item. The
return item shows that an inbound delivery is expected for the upper-level item.
Release all service items.
Choose Save. Make a note of the transaction number.
_______________________________
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 373/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 374/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-27
In our example, the technicians decide to perform the repair using a service and a spare
part.
1-4-1 Create Diagnosis Item
Open your repair order to add the diagnosis item.
Choose Change if you are in a display mode. Create a sub item of category Diagnosis for the main repair item. The diagnosis item shows that a diagnosis is
necessary.
1-4-2 Create Repair Steps for the diagnosis item
Create sub items for the diagnosis item using action functionality.
Mark the repair item line enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Product SRV2_9
The system proposes the item being repaired as the material. Since we will be
using a spare part in our repair, replace the material HT-1011 with the followinginformation:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Product HT-1069
Quantity 1
To confirm your entries, select Enter.
Release the line items.
Release the transaction on the header level.
Choose Save.
1-5 Repair completion confirmation
After completion of the repair, the service technician reports working time and materialused.
1-5-1 Create the confirmation as a follow up transaction from your repair order.
Copy all the line items into the confirmation.
Change the service technician assignment. Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 375/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-28
Service Employee Windham
Select Enter to confirm.
Switch to the Services view.
Enter the following duration data:
Product Actual Duration
SRV_DIAGNOSIS 20 MIN
SRV2_9 60 MIN
Change the confirmation’s status to complete.
Choose Save.
1-6 Order: Return delivery for the repair
You create a new item to trigger the return delivery of the repaired notebook.
1-6-1 Open your in-house repair order..
Choose Change if you are in a display mode.
Create a delivery repair line by triggering the action from the return for repair lineitem.
The system will create a new item line that triggers the return delivery of the
repaired notebook.
Release the line items.
Choose Save.
1-7 Logistics: Return delivery for the repair
The notebook is returned to the customer. When you post goods issue for the delivery,
stock adjusts accordingly.
1-7-1 Create an outbound delivery..
Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Shipping point 3800
Selection data Today’s date
Order Your transaction number
Choose Enter .
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 376/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-29
Choose Subsequent Functions → Create Transfer Order .
In the dialog box, choose Yes.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 377/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-30
Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Warehouse Number 038
Delivery default proposal
Foreground/Backgrnd System Guided
Adopt pick quantity 2
Choose Enter .
Save.
1-7-2 Stock Overview
View the stock levels with the stock overview transaction.
Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type DescriptionMaterial HT-1011
Plant 3800
Choose Execute (F8).
The sales order stock for the In-House-repair has been reduced
accordingly. Depending on the initial stock situation in the demo system, itmight be that no sales order stock appears at all.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 378/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-31
In-House Repair Solutions
Unit: In-House Repair
Topic: In-House Repair
1-1 The following process flow will give you an overview over all possible process steps
which can be performed.
Process Flow
• Order: Repair request and send in repair
• Logistic: Return for repair
• Order: Technical analysis and subsequent actions (repair and temporaryreplacement)
• Logistic: Loan device delivery
• Repair completion confirmation
• Order: Return delivery for the repair
• Logistic: Return delivery for the repair
1-2 Order: Repair request and send in repairs
The customer informs you that he has a notebook with bad display (horizontal lines inthe display) that he would like you to repair.
You record the details of the customer's repair request (reference object; kind of
damage) as the main item in a repair order.
You create a return item which shows that an inbound delivery is expected for thenotebook. The unique RMA number (Return Material Authorization) is made up of the
unique number of the In-house repair order and the item number of the returns item.
The customer uses the RMA number to send the defective product in for repair.
1-2-1 Create In-House Repair document of type SAP Repairs.Log on to the Enterprise Portal
Navigate to Service & Support → In-House Repair Orders
Choose Create.
Choose SAP Repairs.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 379/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-32
Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Sold-To Party ##MEGASTORE
Description In-House Repair ##
Priority Very High
To confirm your entries, choose Enter.
In the Product tab, choose Add Entry.
Enter the product HT-1011 with quantity 1.
To confirm your entries, choose Enter.
If the system proposes the assignment of a service contract, choose No
assignment.
Stay on the Product s tab. Choose the Reference Objects tab for the item level.
Choose Add Entry.
Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Component 3305
Choose Enter to confirm your entries.
If the system proposes the assignment of a service contract, choose Noassignment.
The system informs you if the object is under warranty.
Choose Technical Analysis for the item level.
On the Technical Analysis tab , use the drop down box to choose Reason for
Complaint..
Choose a reason, such as : Malfunction in LCD display
1-2-2 Create a line item to send in the repair.
Go to the Scheduled Actions tab on item level.
Add an entry. You will receive a pop-up.
Choose action Send in Repairs. The system creates a sub item of category
Return for repair for the main repair item. The return item shows that aninbound delivery is expected for the higher-level item.
Release all service items by choosing Expand and then Release Items.
Save.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 380/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 381/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-34
1-4 Order: Technical analysis and subsequent actions (repair and temporary replacement)
After the notebook sent in for repair is received, a service representative performs atechnical analysis and enters the inspection results. He decide what actions need to be
taken to fulfil the customer's repair request.
The actions, which need to be taken as a result of the technical check, are recorded as sub-items of the diagnosis item. Possible actions include:
• Perform repairs
• Scrap the goods
• Send temporary replacement
In our example, the technician decides to perform the repair using a service and a spare
part.
1-4-1 Create a Diagnosis Item
Navigate to Service & Support → In-House-Repair Orders
Enter the transaction number of the repair order and choose Go.
Choose Change if you are in a display mode.
Choose Scheduled Actions for the main line item .
Choose Add.
Choose Diagnosis The system creates a diagnosis line item.
1-4-2 Create Repair Steps.
Mark the Diagnosis line item and choose Scheduled Actions on the line item level.
Choose Add .
Choose Repairs + Spare Parts.
The system creates two new line items ( Repairs and SAP Service Material Item).
Enter the following data for the repair line item.
Field Name or Data Type Description
Product SRV2_9
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 382/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-35
The system proposes the item being repaired as the material. Since we will be
using a spare part in our repair, replace the material HT-1011 with the followinginformation:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Product HT-1069
Quantity 1
To confirm your entries, select Enter.
Choose Expand .
Choose Release items.
Choose Release ( = release on header level).
Choose Save.
1-5 Repair completion confirmation
After completion of the repair, the service technician reports working time and material
used.
1-5-1 Navigate to Service & Support → In-House Repair Orders
Enter the transaction number of the repair order and choose Go.
Choose Change if you are in a display mode.
Choose Expand .
Choose Create Confirmation.
Choose Confirmation.
In the dialog box, choose Save.
The system opens a new window for the confirmation.
Choose Copy All
Change the service technician assignment. Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Service Employee WindhamSelect Enter to confirm.
Choose the Products tab.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 383/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-36
Use the dropdown box to switch to the Services view:
Enter the following duration data:
Product Actual Duration
SRV_DIAGNOSIS 20 MIN
SRV2_9 60 MIN
Choose Expand .
Choose Complete items.
Choose Save.
1-6 Order: Return delivery for the repair
You create a new item to trigger the return delivery of the repaired notebook.
1-6-1 Navigate to Service & Support → In-House Repair Orders
Enter the transaction number of the repair order and choose Go.
Choose Change if you are in a display mode.
Please delete flag Sel for the main item (1000) before processing the nextstep.
Choose the Return for Repair item line and choose Scheduled Actions for the line
item.
Choose Add .
Choose action Delivery: Repair .
The system creates a new item line that triggers the return delivery of the repairednotebook.
Choose Expand .
Choose Release items.
Choose Save.
1-7 Logistics: Return delivery for the repair
The notebook is returned to the customer. When you post goods issue for the delivery,
stock is adjusted accordingly.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 384/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-37
1-7-1 Navigate to R/3 Integration→ Create Outbound Delivery.
Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Shipping point 3800
Selection data Today’s date
Order Your transaction
number
Choose Enter .
Choose Subsequent Functions → Create Transfer Order .
In the dialog box, choose Yes.
Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Warehouse Number 038
Delivery default proposal
Foreground/Backgrnd System Guided
Adopt pick quantity 2
Choose Enter .
Save.
1-7-2 Stock Overview
Navigate to R/3 Integration → Stock Overview R/3.
Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Material HT-1011
Plant 3800
Choose Execute (F8)
The sales order stock for the In-House-repair has been reduced accordingly.Depending on the initial stock situation in the demo system, it might be that no
sales order stock appears at all.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 385/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-38
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 386/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-39
Solutions
Unit: In-House Repair
Topic: In-House Repair
1-1 The following process flow will give you an overview over process steps which can be performed.
Process Flow
• Order: Repair request and send in repair
• Logistic: Return for repair
• Order: Technical analysis and subsequent actions (repair and temporary replacement)
• Logistic: Loan device delivery
• Repair completion confirmation
• Order: Return delivery for the repair
• Logistic: Return delivery for the repair
1-2 Order: Repair request and send in repairs
The customer informs you that he has a notebook with bad display (horizontal lines in the display) that
he would like you to repair.
You record the details of the customer's repair request (reference object; kind of damage) as the main
item in a repair order.
You create a return item which shows that an inbound delivery is expected for the notebook. The unique
RMA number (Return Material Authorization) is made up of the unique number of the In-house repairorder and the item number of the returns item. The customer uses the RMA number to send the defective
product in for repair.
1-2-1 Create In-House Repair document of type SAP Repairs.
Log on to the CRM system.
SAP Menu → Service → Maintain Complaints and In-House Repairs
From the menu: Business Transaction → Create.
Choose Complaints SAP Repairs.
Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Sold-To Party ##MEGASTORE
Description In-House Repair ##
Priority Very High
To confirm your entries, choose Enter.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 387/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-40
Enter the product the customer wishes to return:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Product HT-1011
Quantity 1
To confirm your entries, choose Enter.
If the system proposes the assignment of a service contract, choose No assignment.
Enter the following component information:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Component 3305
Choose Enter to confirm your entries.
If the system proposes the assignment of a service contract, choose No assignment.
The system informs you if the object is under warranty.
Enter a reason for the complaint; use the drop down box to choose a reason.
Choose a reason, such as Malfunction in LCD display
1-2-2 Create a line item to send in the repair.
Choose button Send in Repairs.
The system creates a sub item of category Return for repair for the main repair item. The return
item shows that an inbound delivery is expected for the higher-level item.
Release all service items by choosing Release Items.
Save.
Note the transaction number.
_______________________________
1-3 Logistics: Return for Repair
The notebook arrives at your service plant. You post goods receipt. It is posted under repair orderstock.
1-3-1 Post Goods receipt
Log on to the R/3 system.
Use the following menu path in the R/3 system:
SAP Menu → Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →
Outbound Delivery→ Create → Single Document → With reference to Sales Order (VL01N).
Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Shipping point 3800
Selection data Today’s date
Order Noted transaction number
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 388/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-41
Delivery Type LR (Returns delivery)
Enter .
Choose Post Goods Receipt.
1-3-2 Check stock.
Use the following R/3 Menu path:
SAP Menu → Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management→ Environment →
Stock → Stock Overview (MMBE)
Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Material HT-1011
Plant 3800
Choose Execute (F8).
Double click on the line Sales order stock The stock for the product sent in for repair is order specific.
Close the window after viewing the information.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 389/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-42
1-4 Order: Technical analysis and subsequent actions (repair and temporary replacement)
After the notebook sent in for repair is received, a service representative performs a technical analysis
and enters the inspection results. He decides what actions need to be taken to fulfil the customer's repairrequest.
The actions, which need to be taken as a result of the technical check, are recorded as sub-items of the
diagnosis item. Possible actions include:
• Perform repairs
• Scrap the goods
• Send temporary replacement
In our example, the technician decides to perform the repair using a service and a spare part.
1-4-1 Create a Diagnosis Item
Open your In-house Repair order.
In the CRM system, use the following menu path:
SAP Menu→ Service→ Maintain Complaints and In-House-Repairs
Choose icon Open Business Transaction
Enter your transaction number and press Enter.
Choose Change if you are in a display mode.
Choose button Diagnosis.
The system creates a diagnosis line item.
Take a look at the item details (e.g. Validation Report tab)
1-4-2 Create Repair Steps.
Use the Actions icon (Toolbox) at the top of the screen and choose Repairs + Spare Parts (1200).
The system proposes service and spare part products (relationships of HT-1011)
First choose service SRV2_9 and choose Enter .
Then choose spare part HT-1069 and choose Enter .
Return to the Fast Entry Screen.
Choose Release items.
Use the Dropdown to change the status In Process to Released
Choose Save.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 390/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-43
1-5 Repair completion confirmation
After completion of the repair, the service technician reports working time and material used.
1-5-1 In your SAP Repair Order, choose Create Follow-Up Transaction
Service Confirmation→ Confirmation
The system displays several items but only the diagnosis, the service and the spare part item areconfirmation relevant.
Check and Copy these three items to the confirmation.
Choose Fast Entry.
Change the service technician assignment. Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Exec. Service Employee Windham (400440)
Select Enter to confirm.
Choose the Services tab.
Enter the following duration data:
Product Actual Duration
SRV_DIAGNOSIS 20 MIN
SRV2_9 60 MIN
Choose Complete.
Choose Save.
1-6 Order: Return delivery for the repair
You create a new item to trigger the return delivery of the repaired notebook.
1-6-1 Use the icon Open Business Transaction.
Enter the transaction number of the In-House Repair Order and press Enter.
Alternatively you could use the backwards icon in order to go back to your In-House
Repair order.
Choose Change if you are in a display mode.
Use the Actions icon (Toolbox) and choose Delivery: Repair (1100).
The system creates a new item line that triggers the return delivery of the repaired notebook.
Choose Release Items.
Use the Dropdown to change the status In Process to Released .
Choose Save.
1-7 Logistics: Return delivery for the repair
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 391/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-44
The notebook is returned to the customer. When you post goods issue for the delivery, stock is adjusted
accordingly.
1-7-1 Create an outbound delivery in the R/3 system.
Use the R/3 menu path:
SAP Menu → Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation →
Outbound Delivery→ Create → Single Document → With reference to Sales Order (VL01N).
Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Shipping point 3800
Selection data Today’s date
Order Your transaction number
Choose Enter .
Choose Subsequent Functions → Create Transfer Order .
In the dialog box, choose Yes.
Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Warehouse Number 038
Delivery default proposal
Foreground/Backgrnd Background
Adopt pick quantity 2
Choose Enter .
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 392/494
© SAP AG CR700 7-45
1-7-2 Stock Overview
Use the following R/3 Menu path:
SAP Menu → Logistics → Materials Management→ Inventory Management →
Environment→ Stock → Stock Overview (MMBE)
Enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Description
Material HT-1011
Plant 3800
Choose Execute (F8)
The sales order stock for the In-House-repair has been reduced accordingly. Depending on the
initial stock situation in the demo system, it might be that no sales order stock appears at all.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 393/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-1
SAP AG 2004
Enterprise Intelligence
6. Complaints and Returns
7. In-House Repair
8. Enterprise Intelligence
9. E-Service
10. Service Analytics
Appendix
1. Overview of CRM Service
2. Installed Base; Individual
Object
3. Service Contract & Entitlement
4. Planned Services
5. Service Order Management
Day 3
Day 1 Day 2
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 394/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-2
SAP AG 2004
Enterprise Intelligence
Solution Database
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 395/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-3
SAP AG 2004
At the conclusion of this unit you will be able to:
Describe the Software Agent Framework
Maintain problems and solutions
Perform SDB searches
Enterprise Intelligence: Unit Objectives
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 396/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-4
SAP AG 2004
Enterprise Intelligence: Access
Portal*
Mobile Device*
Internet (E-Service)
Customer
IC Agent Service Rep
CRM Portal
Administrator
PC UI
IC WebClient
IC WinClient
Enterprise
Intelligence
*=Not Supported in CRM 4.0
Customer: Within E-Service, a customer can perform a solution search to find solutions to problems orother issues.
CRM Portal Administrator: Creates and maintains knowledge base structure. The Administrator also
makes content available to that it can be accessed.
IC Agent: Interaction Center agents can perform a solution search and then e-mail solutions to problems
to the customer. Automatic suggestion of solutions guarantees that the agent is able to respond fast.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 397/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-5
SAP AG 2004
Software Agent Framework: Overview
Other SAP CRM
Database(s)
Other SAP
Database(s)
Non-SAP
Database(s)
Case
Service Order
Ibase (e.g., BP)
HR
FI
PLM (e.g., Equipment)
Lotus Notes
SQL
DBMS
Solution Database
(SDB)
Problems
Solutions
FAQs
Software Agent
Framework
SAP Service ProcessesSAP Service Processes
Business Partner
(from Ibase)
Business Partner
(from Ibase)Plant Info
(from Equipment)
Plant Info
(from Equipment)
CompileCompile
A single Knowledge Entity is
created with both pieces of
information
A single Knowledge Entity iscreated with both pieces of
information
The Software Agent Framework (SAF) provides an open architecture that can integrate tools to easilyand flexibly assemble information from multiple SAP CRM data sources, SAP non-CRM data sources
(such as Business Information Warehouse and SAP R/3), and external data sources. Examples of such
tools are compilation, classification, and search services.
Software Agent Framework Features:
Define Knowledge Bases.
Compile the content of knowledge bases into search indexes (requires Text Retrieval and Information
Extraction - TREX).
Automatically synchronize knowledge bases and search indexes (requires TREX).
Cluster the contents of search indexes for knowledge bases (requires TREX).
Search a knowledge base.
Refine the search (requires TREX).
Build your own information security for knowledge bases. See SAP Note 656321 for more information.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 398/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-6
SAP AG 2004
Solution Database
• Categorization of
information
• Indexed database
for quick retrieval
• Security profiles
Problem
Solution
Corporate repository of enterprise knowledge
Attachments
EN
FR
ES
DE
SolutionProblem
Object Object
JA
The Solution Database (SDB) is a repository of information that is stored in the form of problems andsolutions, and is indexed for immediate retrieval.
The SDB offers a basic interface for knowledge administrators (but also agents, field engineers, and
other users) to search for problems and solutions.
The search engine used in the SDB is TREX. For TREX to find problems and solutions in a search, your
knowledge administrators must compile the SDB using the Indexes application.
The SDB is used as a knowledge base in the following applications:
Knowledge search of Interaction Center (IC) WebClient and IC WinClient.
Standalone knowledge search (transaction CRMM_SEARCH).
Solution search and frequently asked questions (FAQs) of E-Service.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 399/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-7
SAP AG 2004
Problem Record Structure
ProblemProblem
Problem TypeProblem Type
Multi-language DescriptionMulti-language Description
Problem Category (Optional)Problem Category (Optional)Problem Category (Optional)
Problem Code (Optional)Problem Code (Optional)Problem Code (Optional)
PriorityPriorityPriority
Detail Problem Attributes (Optional)Detail Problem Attributes (Optional)
Status - System and User Status - System and User
Validation Category(ies) (Optional)Validation Category(ies) (Optional)
Application AreaApplication AreaApplication Area
Validity DatesValidity DatesValidity Dates
Subject Profile (Optional)SubjectSubject ProfileProfile (Optional)(Optional)
LocationsLocationsLocations
CausesCausesCauses
DamagesDamagesDamages
Business Object Link (Optional)Business Object Link (Optional)
Default by Problem
Type, but can be
changed
Default by Problem
Type, but can be
changed
A problem is a change in a product or system that indicates a malfunction of some type. A problem can be described by freeform text and catalog code attributes. Problems and their solutions are stored and
linked in the Solution Database. The Solution Database can be searched by entering freeform text or
attributes to find one or more appropriate problems, from which one or more solutions can be accessed.
Problems are typically created by Knowledge Engineers.
User settings allow personalization of the solution database screen:
You can use default Problem or Solution Type during Create mode.
You can automatically create a new Solution or Problem for linking.
You can personalize the tree and toolbar view: all or limited buttons on toolbar, technical key on tree
(for example, problem number code), Help tips on tree, details on tree.
These settings are saved by user log on.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 400/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-8
SAP AG 2004
Solution Record Structure
SolutionSolution
Detail Solution AttributesDetail Solution Attributes
Subject ProfileSubject ProfileSubject Profile
Solution CategorySolution CategorySolution Category
Validation CategoryValidation CategoryValidation Category
Validity DatesValidity DatesValidity Dates
Internet URLInternet URLInternet URL
Document (CAD, Word, etc.)Document (CAD, Word, etc.)Document (CAD, Word, etc.)
Image (.jpg, .gif, etc.)Image (.Image (. jpg jpg, .gif, etc.), .gif, etc.)
MultimediaMultimediaMultimedia
Solution TypeSolution Type
Multi-language DescriptionMulti-language Description
TasksTasks
AttachmentsAttachments
System Status and User StatusSystem Status and User Status
A solution is an action or process that will eliminate a symptom and the problem indicated by thesymptom. A solution can be described by freeform text, required actions, or attachments that illustrate
and support the required actions. Solutions and their problems are stored and linked in the Solution
Database.
Solutions are typically created by knowledge engineers.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 401/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-9
SAP AG 2004
Problem: Solution Relationship
Problem 01Problem 01
Problem 02Problem 02
Problem 03Problem 03
Solution 01Solution 01
Solution 02Solution 02
Solution 03Solution 03
Solution 04Solution 04
One to One...One to Many...
Many to One...
A relationship links problems and solutions. Problems and solutions are linked to make it easier for users of the Solution Database to quickly find the
solutions relevant to a specific problems, and vice versa. For example, when an agent searches for a
problems in the Solution Database, the system also displays the solutions linked to the problems.
To link a solution to a problems, a knowledge engineer can create a new solution and link it to the
problems, or search for an existing solution and link it to the problems. The same applies to links from
solutions to problems.
When you create a problems using the wizard, you can simultaneously create a solution that is
automatically linked to the problems. Likewise, when you create a solution using the wizard, you can
simultaneously create a problems that is automatically linked to the solution.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 402/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-10
SAP AG 2004
Compilation Service
Problems and Solutions must be compiled prior to search
The following compilation options are available:
Full Compilation Delta Compilation
Cluster
Delta or Full Compilations can be scheduled as background jobs at regular
intervals
Full Compilation: Compiles all documents. This option is recommended initially and if the index iscorrupted.
Delta Compilation: Compiles all new and changed documents since the last compilation, and removes
deleted documents from the index. If a database needs periodic or heavy modification, it may be more
convenient to use this option because, for example, you could compile all the documents in a single run
at the end of the day.
Cluster: Groups documents and features into different classes called clusters. The document/cluster
relationship and feature/cluster relationship are used to refine the results of searches, for example,
searches carried out using the knowledge search of the Interaction Center WebClient.
Clustering is carried out separately from compilation because reindexing is rarely necessary after the
initial full compilation, but reclustering is often desired when the percentage difference between the
number of documents at the last clustering and the number of new, changed, and deleted documents
exceeds a certain threshold. This threshold is defined in Customizing. For search refinement to work,clustering must always be carried out after each full compilation. Clustering is not necessary after a delta
compilation, but is recommended if the percentage difference is large. Clustering cannot be scheduled as
a background job.
Delete Index: Full compilation is necessary afterwards.
Background jobs can be scheduled, for example, to trigger daily updates.
A compilation log stores compilation information, for example, timestamp of last comp.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 403/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-11
SAP AG 2004
Knowledge Search
CRMM_SEARCH
• DB selection
• Multi-lingual
• Exact phrase
In the Interaction Center, agents use the knowledge search to: Find solutions to problems or other issues that are reported by customers through channels such as
telephone, e-mail, and chat
(IC WebClient only) Find cases
Standalone knowledge search
The standalone knowledge search is used to find solutions to problems. As its name suggests, it gives
you the flexibility of a knowledge search outside the Interaction Center. From the SAP Menu, you can
access the standalone knowledge search by choosing Service→ Enterprise Intelligence→ Knowledge
Search or by using transaction CRMM_SEARCH.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 404/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-12
SAP AG 2004
Text Mining Engine (TREX)
What it is: SAP’s text mining engine; Text Retrieval and Information
Extraction
Automatic text-analysis and document classification
Features:
Automatic document classification and indexing
Feature extraction
Automatic generation of a thesaurus
Analysis of relationships between documents
Full-text search
Document clustering
For the search engine TREX to find documents in a search, the knowledge base must first be compiled inthe language in which it is to be searched.
TREX offers a flexible architecture that can be modified to different requirements. A minimal TREX
system consists of a single host that provides all TREX functions. You can use a minimal system as a
demo and test system, or as a productive system.
For more information go to http://service.sap.com/ep and then to SAP Enterprise Portal in Detail→
Knowledge Management→ Retrieval and Classification (TREX)
Installation information can be found on the service marketplace http://service.sap.com/instguides
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 405/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-13
SAP AG 2004
Search Engine (TREX)
What it is:
SAP’s search engine
Used to index and search large amounts of short textFeatures:
Supports both text and attribute searches
Boolean operators AND, OR, NOT
Proximity operator NEAR
Multiple search methods
Fuzzy
Exact
Linguistic
Wildcard
Phrase
Benefits:
Total Cost of Ownership
Multilingual indexing capabilities
Above you find the list of features of the TREX Search Engine. For more information, you can consider SAP Notes
600375 (and attached document TREX_Recommendations_english.zip)
638585 (and attached document TREX_ABAP_Client_Description.zip)
663630 (and attached document SupportedFileFormats.zip)
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 406/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-14
SAP AG 2004
11
Auto Suggest
...printer...problem...
paper...jam
IC Web Client
Inbox
22
Solution Database
Problems
Solutions
44 Solution
Use the attached
manual to...
Alert33
Auto Suggest of Solutions: Classifies textual problem descriptions to enable automatic solutionrecommendations.
Maintenance tools improve accuracy and performance of classification services.
Configurable components for threshold settings, learning mode and time parameters.
Entity status: new, changed/deleted, approved and rejected.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 407/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-15
SAP AG 2004
People-Centric UI–Role: CRM Portal Administrator
The CRM Portal Administrator creates the infrastructureof the portal. These tasks are technical in nature.
Tasks of the CRM Portal Administrator
Create and maintain knowledge base structure Initiate and coordinate goals of the knowledge experts
Initiate and manage document authorizations via security profiles
Analyze feedback from knowledge experts and users
Create and maintain solution equivalents
This is one of many standard roles that are available with People-Centric CRM. Besides specific Knowledge Management functions, this role should help the administrator to master
several other tasks, for example:
Manage the server for calculation services for Workforce Management (WFM)
Perform a consistency check for hyperlinks and their navigation targets (consistency check)
For additional information, please refer to the latest Business Package information.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 408/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-16
SAP AG 2004
Enterprise Intelligence: Customizing
Step-by-step instructions to:
Name and Configure Knowledge Base
Name and Configure Search Engine
Configure HTTP Destinations
Configure Learning Engine
Configure Compilation, Clustering and
Classification
Configure Auto Suggest Engine
Configure Application
In Customizing, there are several Wizards available that help you configure the Software AgentFramework: Customer Relationship Management→ Enterprise Intelligence→ Software Agent
Framework
Installation information is available on the service marketplace http://service.sap.com/crm-inst.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 409/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-17
SAP AG 2004
Enterprise Intelligence: Unit Summary
You are now able to:
Describe the Software Agent Framework
Maintain problems and solutions
Perform SDB searches
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 410/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-18
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 411/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-19
Exercises
Unit: Enterprise Intelligence
Topic: Solution Database
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Create a Problem and a Solution
• Update the solution database
• Perform a knowledge/solution search
Your company would like to use a solution database that allows you tosearch for solutions to known problems. Therefore, you maintain master
data (Problems and Solutions). The solution search can be used in the
Interaction Center as well as in the E-Service scenario in order to allowyour customers to search for solutions themselves.
1-1 Create a new problem.
1-1-1 Create a problem with problem type SM (Service/Plant Management).
1-1-2 What default values are filled by the problem type SM? ______________
1-1-3 Select a problem code from the MONITOR code group.
Enter the problem text, The screen ## is green, where ## is your group number.
1-1-4 For your problem, the priority level should be 2; the application area is Hardware.
The problem should be valid for the next 10 days.
1-1-5 Release the problem (if using the PCUI, save it at this time).
Your problem number:______________________________
1-2 Create and link a new solution.
1-2-1 If you have closed your problem, open your problem in change mode.
1-2-2 Create and link a new solution to your problem. What solution type is automatically
assigned to your solution? _______________________
1-2-3 Enter the solution text: Adjust the color settings for monitor##. The screen
should be blue.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 412/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-20
1-2-4 Enter the Internet address www.sap.com as an attachment.
1-2-5 Release the solution and Save.
Your solution number: ____________________
1-3 Compile the Solution Database.
1-3-1 Call the appropriate URL (provided by your instructor) where you can administer
the knowledge bases.
Compile the solution database SBD language EN.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 413/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-21
Exercise
Unit: Enterprise Intelligence
Topic: Search Engine
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Perform Solution Database searches
The help desk agents have to find solutions for the customers’
problems.
2-1 Perform a Solution Database search for your problem within CRM.
2-1-1 Perform a search with search text, I have a green screen ##.
2-1-2 Look at the details of the solution you maintained in the previous exercise.
2-1-3 E-mail this solution to CRM-##[email protected].
2-1-4 Open the Business Workplace and check for new mails in the Inbox.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 414/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-22
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 415/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-23
Solutions
Unit: Enterprise Intelligence
Topic: Solution Database
Log on to the Enterprise Portal with an user (provided by your trainer).
1-1 Create a new problem.
Top-level navigation Service and Support → Problems
1-1-1 Choose Create.
Field Name or Data Type Values
Problem Type SM-Service/Plant
Management
Press Enter .
1-1-2 Problem Subtype and Priority Type are filled with default values.
1-1-3 Select a problem code from the Monitor code group and add some descriptive text
for the problem.
Problem details tab
Field Name or Data Type Values
Code Select a code from code groupMONITOR (scroll down)
Long text tab
Field Name or Data Type Values
Long text tab the screen ## is green
Go back to Problem Details tab.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 416/494
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 417/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-25
1-2-4 Attach a link to a URL to your solution.
Attachment tab
Choose Create URL.
Enter the following information:
Field Name or Data Type ValuesURL www.sap.com
Name SAP
Choose Create URL.
1-2-5 On Solution Details tab, choose Solution Status Released .
Choose Save.
Solution number: see Solution field.
1-3 Delta-compile the Solution Database to update the SDB.
1-3-1 Call the appropriate URL (provided by your trainer) to administer the knowledge
bases.
Mark the entry SDB with language EN.
Choose Actions Delta Compile.
Choose Go.
Note: It might be possible that another student initiated the compilation right before
and that no change in the total number of records is visible.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 418/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-26
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 419/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-27
Solution
Unit: Enterprise Intelligence
Topic: Search Engine
2-1 Perform a Solution Database search for your problem within CRM.
SAP menu→ Service → Enterprise Intelligence→ Knowledge Search
2-1-1 Enter the search text in the upper-right section of the screen.
Field Name or Data Type Values
Any of these terms I have a green screen ##
Choose Search.
The search results should also list your problem.
2-1-2 Take a look at the details of the solution you maintained in the exercise above.
Field Name or Data Type Values
Search results Mark your entry
Choose Details.Information on the problem and the solution display.
2-1-3 E-mail this solution to you.
Choose Add to Cart .
Choose E-mail.
Enter CRM-##[email protected].
2-1-4 Log on to the CRM system.
Menu → Business Workplace
Select Inbox .
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 420/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-28
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 421/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-29
Solutions
Unit: Enterprise Intelligence
Topic: Solution Database
1-1 Create a new problem.
In your CRM system, choose the menu path:
SAP Menu → Service → Enterprise Intelligence → Solution Database → Maintain
Problems and Solutions (IS01)
1-1-2 In the top area on the screen (the section labeled Problem)
Choose Create.
Field Name or Data Type Values
Problem Type SM-Service/Plant
Management
Press Enter .
1-1-2 Problem Subtype and Priority Type are filled with default values.
1-1-3 Select a problem code from the Monitor code group and add some descriptive textfor the problem.
Field Name or Data Type Values
Problem Code Select a code from code group
MONITOR
In the Long text area
Field Name or Data Type Values
Long text the screen ## is green
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 422/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-30
1-1-4 Add the following data on the Details tab:
Field Name or Data Type Values
Priority Level 2
Application Area HARDWAREValid-From Date Today’s date
Valid-To Date Today’s date plus 10 days
1-1-5 Release your problem.
Field Name or Data Type Values
Problem Status Released
Choose Released from the drop down box.
1-2 Create and link a new solution.
1-2-1 Choose the icon Create and Link a Solution
1-2-2 What solution type is automatically assigned to your
solution?_______________________
The solution is of type SL (Solution Description).
1-2-5 Add some text for your solution.
Long Text for Solution
Field Name or Data Type Values
Text Adjust the color settings for
monitor##. The screen
should be blue.
1-2-6 Attach a link to a URL to your solution.
On the left side of the screen, open the Linked solution. all the way to the level
showing AttachmentsDouble click on the word Attachment .
You will now see a tab appear on the right side in your solution.
Click on the icon Create URL
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 423/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-31
Enter the following information:
Field Name or Data Type Values
URL www.sap.com
Name SAP
1-2-5 Release the solution.
Choose Release (the green flag icon on your solution).
Choose Save.
Solution number: see Solution field.
1-3 Delta-compile the Solution Database to update the SDB.
1-3-1 Call the appropriate URL (provided by your trainer) to administer the knowledge
bases.
Mark the entry SDB with language EN.
Choose Actions Delta Compile.
Choose Go.
Note: It might be possible that another student initiated the compilation right before
and that no change in the total number of records is visible.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 424/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-32
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 425/494
© SAP AG CR700 8-33
Solutions
Unit: Enterprise Intelligence
Topic: Search Engine
2-1 Perform a Solution Database search for your problem within CRM.
SAP menu→ Service→ Enterprise Intelligence→ Knowledge Search
2-1-2 Enter the search text in the upper-right section of the screen.
Field Name or Data Type Values
Any of these terms I have a green screen ##
Choose Search.
The search results should also list your problem.
2-1-2 Take a look at the details of the solution you maintained in the exercise above.
Field Name or Data Type Values
Search results Mark your entry
Choose Details.Information on the problem and the solution display.
2-1-3 E-mail this solution to you.
Choose Add to Cart .
Choose E-mail.
Enter CRM-##[email protected].
2-1-4 Log on to the CRM system.
Menu → Business Workplace
Select Inbox .
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 426/494
© SAP AG CR700 9-1
SAP AG 2004
E-Service
6. Complaints and Returns
7. In-House Repair
8. Enterprise Intelligence
9. E-Service
10. Service Analytics
Appendix
1. Overview of CRM Service
2. Installed Base; Individual
Object
3. Service Contract & Entitlement
4. Planned Services
5. Service Order Management
Day 3
Day 1 Day 2
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 427/494
© SAP AG CR700 9-2
SAP AG 2004
E-Service
mySAP CRM E-Service Functionalities
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 428/494
© SAP AG CR700 9-3
SAP AG 2004
E-Service: Unit Objectives
At the conclusion of this unit you will be able to:
Describe the E-Service functions
Explain how to use E-Service
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 429/494
© SAP AG CR700 9-4
SAP AG 2004
E-Service: Overview
Account Self-Service: Registration
Knowledge Management
FAQ’s by Product
Solution Search
Installed Base Management
Product Registration
Request Management
Complaints and Returns Management
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 430/494
© SAP AG CR700 9-5
SAP AG 2004
Account Self-Service: Registration
B2B B2C
Contact Person for
a registered company
Contact Person for a
non-registered company
Private Consumer
Consumer with a
Customer ID
Registration information is validated against CRM (for example, country, region, postal code) Optional to customize the immediate creation of the accounts or have a workflow triggered to the
security administrator (there is a workflow in registration process that you can configure so that someone
has to get authorization from company to activate the account)
Security administrator will assign information security profile (covered later)-segments data so they can
get access for specific data in the solution db.
A Web user can be either a service user or a named user. Each type comes with a different authorization
profile. In the standard scenario, Web users would browse anonymously through the Web site as service
users. When they login, they switch to a named user based on their own authorization profile and
business partner data.
When they are connected to business partners, users do not need to actually log in to access functions
that would normally require that they be logged in. This feature does not depend on the user type (named
user or service user). For security purposes, users of type named user cannot switch to other users.
After the customer has logged in they can maintain their personal data, such as changing their address.
In Customizing, you find settings for the Registration Process:
SAP Implementation Guide→ Customer Relationship Management→ E-Service→ Internet Customer
Self Service→ Set Up Registration Process
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 431/494
© SAP AG CR700 9-6
SAP AG 2004
FAQ‘s by Product
Search Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ’s)
FAQ’s are linked to a Product and Problem
Products must be defined in the product hierarchy
FAQ’s are linked to Problems in Released Status and with at least one
Released Solution
To set up FAQ’s attached to Products, take the following steps in the CRM system. Go to Maintain Frequently Asked Questions transaction
In the dialog box that appears, select the product(s) as required and choose Enter . The Display
Frequently Asked Questions screen appears.
Switch the screen to Maintain mode by choosing Display/Maintain. If no FAQs have been maintained
for the product, the Search for Problems dialog box appears. This is because each FAQ has to be linked
to a specific problem. (When subsequently maintaining FAQ’s for a different product, you can link a
different FAQ to the same problem.)
You can now carry out one or both of the following options:
Find problems yourself / Use the Search for Symptoms dialog box to find Specific problems/ Propose
problems automatically / Cancel the Search for Symptoms dialog box and choose Propose Symptoms.
To set up FAQ’s attached to Products, take the following steps in the CRM system.
Double-click a problem and maintain an FAQ by replacing the default text beginning with How to …with your own text, or by editing the existing FAQ.
If your product is a PC hard drive, your problem is hard drive crashes, your solution is to restore the hard
drive, your FAQ might be "How to restore a PC hard drive after a crash".
If your list of problems includes problems for which you do not want to maintain an FAQ for this
product, double-click the problem and choose Unlink . Then save your data.
If automatic compilation is not switched on, compile the solution database index. This enables the search
engine to find the FAQ’s. For more information, see the SAP Library documentation Solution Database.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 432/494
© SAP AG CR700 9-7
SAP AG 2004
Solution Search
SearchTerms
Solution
Database
Problems
Solutions
Words, phrases
Consolidated Knowledge Repository – flexible structuring of enterprise knowledge. Information Security – create security profiles with personalized views
(Internet user, Call Center agents, Knowledge Administrator).
FAQ Search – linked to a Product, Products must be defined in the
product catalog.
Enhanced Search Engine (TREX) – exact text and fuzzy search methods, for searching structured and
unstructured knowledge located across the enterprise.
Live Web Collaboration.
Worldwide language support.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 433/494
© SAP AG CR700 9-8
SAP AG 2004
Installed Base Management
Create...
Change...
Display...
...an Installed
Base
Trigger Service Requests or Complaints
Create Installed Base/Component. Web users can add installed bases or components into their Installed Base List.
Web users can create Components of types Individual Product (iProduct), Text, and Object .
Components of type individual Object (iObject) can be created from a new object or from an existing
one.
Display Installed Base List
Web users can view a list of their installed bases. The installed base view can be expanded to display
its components.
When Web users select an installed base or a component from the Installed Base List, they can:
Display the details of the selected installed base or component
Create a sub-component for the selected installed base or component
Create a service request or a complaint for the selected component
Display Installed Base/Component Detail Web users can display the details of an installed base, or of a component within the installed base.
Components can be of type Text , Product , Individual Object (iObject), or Installed base. Web users
can also update components of types Text and Product .
Web users can also create a service request or a complaint related to a component from the installed
base list. Web users can create service requests or complaints for components of all types, except
components of type Installed base.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 434/494
© SAP AG CR700 9-9
SAP AG 2004
Product Registration
Registration of products to
activate warranty
My registered products
Create service request/
complaint for registered
product
Individual Object
Your customers register products and services to activate their warranty. Once a product is registered, itis added to the My Registered Products page, where customers can find all their registered products. For
each product, they can view warranty information, create service requests, and create complaints. In this
process customers register a product over the Web by logging in and choosing their purchased product
from the integrated product catalog.
Before products can be registered, they need an entry in the Permitted Object Categories (Product
Master→ SAP Basic Data).
Product registration leads to the creation of an individual object in the CRM system.
Display of individual objects in CRM-System (transaction COMMPR01) is possible with user parameter
COMMPR01_IND_OBJ = X. Customer and product information is available within Relationships.
In Customizing, you find settings for Product Registration under:
SAP Implementation Guide→ Customer Relationship Management→ E-Service→ Internet CustomerSelf Service→ Product Registration
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 435/494
© SAP AG CR700 9-10
SAP AG 2004
Request Management
Service Request
Warranty Entitlement Check
Appointment Offering
My Requests
Contract
Web users can link Service Requests to products, registered products, and installed bases. They cancreate requests from within the Product Registration and Installed Base Management processes. Web
users can validate their warranty and service contract entitlements during request creation.
When Web users create a Service Request, they specify which product, installed base, or registered
product is concerned by the request. They also select the service that they need. Upon service selection,
the system will search for:
Contracts that cover the requested service. If the service is covered by more than one contracts, users
will select the most suitable one.
Available appointments for this service. Users will select a time that is convenient for them.
Web users can also:
Attach documents.
Display their service requests and monitor their status. If a service request is covered by a service
contract, that contract can be viewed in the detail view of the service request. If a service request waslinked to a solution, that solution can also be viewed in the detail view of the service request.
Update their Service Request details by adding information and/or changing their status. They can also
add new attachments. However, if they want to change the appointment scheduled for a service, they
must call their customer service representative.
Chronologically display texts that they entered as well as replies entered by the agent.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 436/494
© SAP AG CR700 9-11
SAP AG 2004
Complaints and Returns Management
Return / Replacement
Warranty Entitlement Check
Credit Memo
Contract
Web users can create complaints about goods or services that they deem unsatisfactory. Each complaintis made up of items that Web users add to the complaint. For each complaint item, users explain why
their expectations were not met and state the actions that they request from you.
Web users can:
Request a credit, a return or a replacement
Check whether a contract/warranty exists
Specify a reference object (Installed Base Component or Registered Product)
Attach documents
In Customizing, you can specify which transaction types you would like to use in the internet customer
self-service scenario.
SAP Implementation Guide→ Customer Relationship Management→ E-Service→ Internet Customer
Self Service→ Set Up Internet Transactions→ Define Transaction Types for the Internet (WithoutWeb Requests)
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 437/494
© SAP AG CR700 9-12
SAP AG 2004
E-Service: Unit Summary
You are now able to:
Describe the E-Service functions
Explain how to use E-Service
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 438/494
© SAP AG CR700 9-13
E-Service Exercises
Unit: E-Service
Topic: Product Registration and Service Request
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Self-register as a private consumer at the E-Service scenario
• Register a purchased product
• Create a service request with reference to your registered product
A customer recently bought several high tech products. One of the
purchased products (a laser printer) seems to be malfunctioning. Since theselling company offers self-service functionality over the Internet, thecustomer logs on to a special Web page. At first, the customer searches
for text information on a personal computer. Then the customer registers
the purchased laser printer (warranty!) and creates a service request.
1-1 Frequently Asked Questions
1-1-1 Call the URL that starts the E-Service (B2C) scenario (this information provided by
the trainer).
1-1-2 Go to the FAQ’s area and search for an FAQ referring to a Maxitec Personal
Computer.
1-1-3 Search through until you find a solution to any problem and e-mail this solution.
1-2 Self-registration as a private consumer.
1-2-1 Call the URL that starts the E-Service (B2C) scenario.
1-2-2 Select Log In. A new window pops-up. Since you don’t have a User ID yet, you
have to create one. Therefore, select Register .
Choose Registration Type Private consumer
Enter the following:
Title: Mr./Ms. First Name: Jacky
Last Name: ##Johnson
Street / House Number: Marshall Rd. 8
Postal Code: 90210
City: Beverly Hills
Country / Region: United States / California
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 439/494
© SAP AG CR700 9-14
E-mail Address: [email protected]
User ID: JJ##
Password / Confirm Password: init / init
Choose Submit . After the registration process finishes, close the window.
1-3 Product registration
1-3-1 Log on to the E-Service with User ID and password created in the previous
exercise.
1-3-2 Choose the link that leads you to the area where you can register products.
In the catalog area on the left hand side, navigate to the Laser Printer area and
select the product Laser Allround .
Fill out product information.
Color type: Both
Resolution: 2400
Serial Number: 12345-##
Printer Speed (ppm): 40
Purchase Date: today
Choose the Register button, review the data, and the select the Submit
Registration.
Note the registration number._________________________
1-4 Optional: Create a Service Request for your newly registered product.
1-4-1 Look at the list of registered products. You should see one line item. Select theService Request link at the end of this line. A form Service Request High Tech displays.
Enter the following:
Priority: High
Subject: Printer is noisy
Damage Category: Printer
Damage Code: Loud Noise
Reference Object: Registered Product Description: <any>
Take a look at the warranty status.
Save the service request and note the number. ________________
1-4-2 View the service request within the PC UI or SAPGUI.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 440/494
© SAP AG CR700 9-15
Solutions
Unit: E-Service
Topic: Product registration and service request
1-1 Frequently Asked Questions
1-1-1 Call the URL that starts the E-Service (B2C) scenario (the trainer will provide this
information).
1-1-2 Go to the FAQ’s area and search for an FAQ referring to a Maxitec Personal
Computer.
Select FAQ’s.
Field Name or Data Type Values
Product category PCShop Products
Product Maxitec-R 3100 Personal
computer
Choose Search.
1-1-3 Use Select until you find a solution to any problem and e-mail this solution.
Use hyperlinks and the E-Mail Address button.
1-2 Self registration as a private consumer
1-2-1 Call the URL that starts the E-Service (B2C) scenario.
1-2-2 Choose Log In. A new window pops-up. Since you don’t have a User ID yet, youhave to create one. Therefore select Register .
See exercises for information to fill in.
1-3 Product registration
1-3-1 Log on to the E-Service with User ID and password created in the previous
exercise.
1-3-2 Select the link that leads you to the area where you can register products.
Select Product .
Menu path: Printers→ Laser Printers → Laser Allround
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 441/494
© SAP AG CR700 9-16
1-4 Optional: Create a Service Request for your newly registered product.
1-4-1 Look at the list of registered products. You should see one line item. Select the
Service Request link at the end of this line. A form Service Request High Tech
displays.
Select My Registered Products.
Choose Service Request (at the end of the line item).
Enter the following:
Priority: High
Subject: Printer is noisy
Damage Category: Printer
Damage Code: Loud Noise
Reference Object: Registered Product
Description: <any>
Take a look at the warranty status.
Select the View Warranties and observe that there is a valid warranty.
Choose Back .
Save the service request and note the number. _____________________
1-4-2 Take a look at the service request within the PCUI or SAPGUI.
To view the service request in the PCUI.
Top-level navigation Service & Support Orders
In the search area, enter the following:
Field Name or Data Type Values
Get Transaction number
Number The one from the exercise
above
Select the Go button.
Look at the document to confirm that this is the request that was created using E-
Service.
You can now further process the service request (for example, adding text,changing status) and check in the E-Service B2C scenario to see whether the
changes are visible.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 442/494
© SAP AG CR700 9-17
To view the service request in the SAPGUI:
Open your service request within the SAPGUI.
Menu path: SAP Menu Service Maintain Service Process
Choose Open Business Transaction (the folder icon)
Enter the transaction number for your service request. Enter
Look at the document to confirm that this is the request that was created using E-
Service.
You can now further process the service request (for example, adding text,changing status) and check in the E-Service B2C scenario to see whether the
changes are visible.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 443/494
© SAP AG CR700 10-1
SAP AG 2004
Service Analytics
6. Complaints and Returns
7. In-House Repair
8. Enterprise Intelligence
9. E-Service
10. Service Analytics
Appendix
1. Overview of CRM Service
2. Installed Base; Individual
Object
3. Service Contract & Entitlement
4. Planned Services
5. Service Order Management
Day 3
Day 1 Day 2
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 444/494
© SAP AG CR700 10-2
SAP AG 2004 SAP AG 2003, CR700,
Service Analytics
mySAP CRM Service Analytics
Data Maintenance
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 445/494
© SAP AG CR700 10-3
SAP AG 2004 SAP AG 2003, CR700,
Service Analytics: Unit Objectives
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Describe the SAP BW content for mySAP CRM Service
Explain how user access Service Analytics functions
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 446/494
© SAP AG CR700 10-4
SAP AG 2004 SAP AG 2003, CR700,
Your enterprise has selected mySAP CRM as its
customer relationship management solution andSAP Business Warehouse as its analysis system.
Therefore, you want to become familiar with the key
capabilities of mySAP CRM Service Analytics. In
addition, you want to learn about SAP Business
Warehouse Service Analysis methods and
possibilities.
Service Analytics: Business Scenario
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 447/494
© SAP AG CR700 10-5
SAP AG 2004 SAP AG 2003, CR700,
mySAP CRM Analytics
Delivers Insight Throughout the Customer Lifecycle
Customer Analytics
Product Analytics
Marketing Analytics
Sales Analytics
Service Analytics
Interaction Channel Analytics
Customer Centric E-Business with mySAP CRM
A key to success of CRM is the ability to answer a variety of questions, for instance about customers, market dynamics, sales or service
performance
gain further insight from these answers and
act upon these insights while interacting with customers, executing marketing campaigns or planning
sales activities
mySAP CRM Analytics provides these capabilities and offers predefined analyses for all of the areas
listed here (refer to graphic)
Particularly strong results can be achieved if the various analyses are combined to create even more
relevant insights and act upon these
For instance, using mySAP CRM analytics a company may want to create a target group of customers
that have low satisfaction (satisfaction and loyalty analysis) and/or are likely to leave (churn
management). The initiative can be further enhanced by identifying those customers in the targetgroup that have high profitability potential (customer life time value analysis) . Based on their recent
behavior (behavior modeling) and propensity to respond to certain offers (cross selling analysis), a
targeted marketing campaign can be initiated, executed and optimized (RFM campaign optimization),
helping to retain these valuable customers.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 448/494
© SAP AG CR700 10-6
SAP AG 2004 SAP AG 2003, CR700,
Critical Steps for CRM Analytics
...
M a s
t e r
D a t a
......
CRM Analytics helps you capture
and integrate your data into a single
360 degree view of your customer
Analytical methods can be used
to analyze your relationships
with your customers and the
efficiency of your actions
Relationship Planninghelps you to coordinate
your actions and focus
your employees on
common targets
Relationship Optimization
The insights gained from the analysis
enable personalized, customer-oriented
actions to be triggered
Data
I n s i
g h t s
I n s
i g
h t
s
Targets
A c t i o n s
The ROI of CRM doesn’t come from doing the same thing faster
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 449/494
© SAP AG CR700 10-7
SAP AG 2004 SAP AG 2003, CR700,
Service Analytics
Service Analytics:
Supports customers in analyzing their service
processes
Provides a complete evaluation infrastructure with
predefined Business Content
Improves service quality, customer satisfaction,
and service profit
Supports early identification of quality issues
Enables real-time cost control
Enables companies to improve their service business
Service Analytics Roles in SAP BW: Service Performance Analysis – Finance Persepective
Service Performance Analysis – Customer Persepective
Service Performance Analysis – Internal Processes
Service Performance Analysis – Learning and Growth
CRM Service – Technical Content
CRM Service - Workbooks
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 450/494
© SAP AG CR700 10-8
SAP AG 2004 SAP AG 2003, CR700,
Analytics in Your People: Centric UI
Analytical
Areas
HCM
Analytics
SCM
Analytics
CRM
Analytics
FI
AnalyticsExternal
Data
Access to all the information you need
Well-Structured
Analytical Tasks
Your
Personalized
Portal
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 451/494
© SAP AG CR700 10-9
SAP AG 2004 SAP AG 2003, CR700,
Enabled business analysis within mySAP CRMService
Evaluation of service processes
Predefined key figures for service process
analysis relating to:
Volume (such as number of orders)
Quality (such as number of complaints)
Cost efficiency (costs and revenues)
Use of predefined key figures for service processanalysis
Additional key figures can be defined
Complete Ready-to-run infrastructure is available
Service Analytics: Features
Ready-to-run infrastructure: Extraction of data by updating the InfoCubes
Analysis using predefined queries and MiniApps
mySAP BW Integration provides additional evaluation options through extraction of the relevant data
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 452/494
© SAP AG CR700 10-10
SAP AG 2004 SAP AG 2003, CR700,
ControllingHeader
Item
ComplaintHeader Item
ServiceCodes
InfoSources for Service Analytics
Case MgmtAttributesObjects
ContractHeader Item
Product list /Object list
IBaseMaster Data
Transactional Data
ConfirmationHeader
Item
Service Order Header
Item
In BW, an InfoSource describes the quantity of all the data available for a business transaction or a type
of business transaction.
An InfoSource is a quantity of information that logically belongs together, summarized into a single unit.
InfoSources contain either transaction data or master data (attributes, texts, and hierarchies).
An InfoSource is always a quantity of InfoObjects that logically belong together. The structure in which
these are stored is called a communication structure.
Additional DataSources exist for:
Service Contract Items (Replication together with Sales and Leasing Contracts)
Complaints in Sales and Service scenarios
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 453/494
© SAP AG CR700 10-11
SAP AG 2004 SAP AG 2003, CR700,
Service Performance Analysis for Service Managers
Service Performance Analysis as a modular
performance measurement system
The service manager can select analyses flexibly,
depending on the current business objective
Structured into 4 balanced views, based on Balanced
Scorecard (Kaplan/Norton):
Finance
Customers
Internal Processes
Learning and Growth
Emphasis is placed on cross-functional analytics so that data can come from a wide variety of sources
including:
Human Capital Management Analytics
Supply Chain Management Analytics
Customer Relationship Management Analytics
Financial Analytics
External analytical data
This means that Service Performance Analysis combines both financial and operational figures in a way
that contributes to the optimization of customer service strategies.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 454/494
© SAP AG CR700 10-12
SAP AG 2004 SAP AG 2003, CR700,
Service Performance Analysis in the Manager Portal
Overview
Changes in cost-revenue ratio during a specific time period
Customer satisfaction rate
Delayed services by service level agreement dates
Headcount analysis
Finance
Cockpit with the most important analyses from the Finance v iew:
Detailed controlling analysis of products in contracts to identifyunprofitable contract products
Detailed controlling analysis of products
Detailed controlling analysis of customers
Changes in profit during the last twelve months
CompetitorsAccounts and Products Installations Act ivity Management AnalyticsHome Service Cycle
Service Performance Analyse
This Workset enables the service manager to analyze
the overall service process
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 455/494
© SAP AG CR700 10-13
SAP AG 2004 SAP AG 2003, CR700,
Service Performance Analysis in the Manager Portal
Customers
Cockpit with the most important analyses from the Customer view:
Highest-revenue customers
Profit per customer
Profit-sales ratio per customer to determine the profitabilityof individual customers
Variance analysis - revenue per sold-to party
Internal Processes
Cockpit with the most important analyses from the Internal view:
Number of service complaints per sold-to party
Services on schedule with requested-by dates
Services on schedule with service level agreement dates
Planning accuracy per service
CompetitorsAccounts and Products Activity Management AnalyticsHome Service Cycle
Service Performance Analysis
Installations
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 456/494
© SAP AG CR700 10-14
SAP AG 2004 SAP AG 2003, CR700,
Service Performance Analysis in the Manager Portal
Learning and Growth
Cockpit with the most important analyses from the Learning and Growth
view:
Illness rate
Number of entries
Overtime rate
Headcount
Balanced View
List of all analyses available for Service Performance Analysis(access of analyses via hyperlink)
CompetitorsAccounts and Products Activity Management AnalyticsHome Service Cycle
Service Performance Analysis
Installations
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 457/494
© SAP AG CR700 10-15
SAP AG 2004 SAP AG 2003, CR700,
Service Analytics Status
Open
In process
Completed
Service Analytics Status
Open
In process
Completed
Service Analytics Performance
In time (Customer)
Not in time (Customer)
Service Level Agreement: in time
Service Level Agreement: not in time
Service Analytics Performance
In time (Customer)
Not in time (Customer)
Service Level Agreement: in time
Service Level Agreement: not in time
Customer Satisfaction Rating
Midsize Companies
Large Companies
Small Companies
Customer Satisfaction Rating
Midsize Companies
Large Companies
Small Companies
Service Analytics as Part of Performance Analysis
Service Analytics Return Reason
Not used
Not in time
Wrong product
Damaged in transit
Service Analytics Return Reason
Not used
Not in time
Wrong product
Damaged in transit
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 458/494
© SAP AG CR700 10-16
SAP AG 2004 SAP AG 2003, CR700,
Goals/Strategy
CRM Service Analytics is a recurring process flow of analysis,forecasting, planning, and the optimization of processes
Planning the available / necessary resources
Increase customer satisfaction
Service Plan Simulation
Calculate planned dates for future service events within a specified
horizon based on selected service plans
Simulate service orders for future service events to estimate the
workload and revenue
Ability to use flexible reporting in BW e.g. aggregation)
Analyzing service workload and utilization of resources
Possibility to compare different forecast versions
Summarize the service order workload by day, week and month within
the simulated horizon
Service Planning and Forecasting
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 459/494
© SAP AG CR700 10-17
SAP AG 2004 SAP AG 2003, CR700,
Key Figures in BW Content Queries:
Number of orders per day / week / month / quarter / year and per
service organization
Processing volume
Number of specific services per day / week … and per service
organization
Service workload/volume
Number of resources/spare parts per day / week … and per service
organization
Resource utilization
Several other characteristics are provided in these queries (e.g. service
team, responsible service organization, service plan)
Key Figures
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 460/494
© SAP AG CR700 10-18
SAP AG 2004 SAP AG 2003, CR700,
Service Analytics: Unit Summary
You are now able to:
Describe the SAP BW content for mySAP CRM Service
Explain how user access Service Analytics functions
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 461/494
© SAP AG CR700 11-1
SAP AG 2004
SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager SAP Solution Manager SAP Solution Manager
Functional ImplementationFunctional Implementation
Technical ImplementationTechnical Implementation
Implementation ofOperations
Implementation ofOperations Support DeskSupport Desk
Services for OperationsServices for Operations
Solution MonitoringSolution Monitoring
Providing tools, content,
procedures and services
to implement and operate
your mySAP Business Suite solution
SAP Solution Manager:
a Customer Platform for Implementation and
Operation of mySAP Business Suite
Implementation Operations
SAP Solution Manager supports you throughout the implementation and operation of SAP solutions. It is
a platform that supports the business solution life cycle, from the Business Blueprint throughconfiguration to production operation. SAP Solution Manager offers central access to preconfigured
content, tools, and methodology that you can use during the evaluation and implementation of your
systems.
For implementation, these include:
Contents for evaluating and implementing business solutions predefined by SAP.
The ASAP methodology for the implementation of business solutions.
Tried and tested implementation and test tools, for example, the Implementation Guide (IMG) or the
Test Workbench.
An authoring function that you can use to create your own project templates for your implementation
project. This makes SAP Solution Manager an ideal tool for SAP partners and companies involved in
global rollouts.
SAP Solution Manager Operations allows you to configure, administer, and monitor systems and business processes for a solution. You can work with overall solutions as well as individual systems,
business processes, and software components. You can also set up and run your own solution support.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 462/494
© SAP AG CR700 11-2
SAP AG 2004
SAP Solution Manager: Use in Implementation
SAP SolutionAP Solution Manager inanager in Implementationmplementation
Configuration
Project
definition
Define Business
Blueprint
Customizing
synchronization
Authorization
Data
transfer
End user
Training and
documentation
Testing
Project
phase
Roadmaps
Project AdministrationCross
functions
Project
activities
Issue Tracking / Status Monitoring / Reporting
Developments
Define
system landscape
Focus of tool support
Project
Preparation
Business
BlueprintRealization Go Live
& Support
Final
preparation
SAP Solution Manager supports you in all phases of the evaluation and implementation. You can
perform the following activities in an evaluation and implementation project with SAP Solution
Manager:
Project Preparation: The Roadmaps contain information and procedures for all phases of your
implementation project. Your work with SAP Solution Manager really begins after the evaluation
phase. The first step is to define your project in SAP Solution Manager.You enter administrative data
in the Project Administration transaction, for example details of project dates and resources. You set
the project scope and you define the system landscape you require for the implementation of your
solution during the project preparation phase.
Business Blueprint: You define a Business Blueprint by documenting the organizational units,
master data, business scenarios and business processes you require for the implementation of your
solution. During the Business Blueprint definition, you read the documentation supplied by SAP and
partners, create your own project documentation and assign individual process steps to transactions. Realization: You configure your business scenarios in the development system. You check the test
cases delivered with your solution and assign further test cases to individual processes and process
steps. You perform a consistency check for the Customizing of your business processes. In other
words, you check whether the Customizing is the same in the various application components. You
synchronize Customizing with Customizing Distribution. You can organize tests. You can reuse the
test cases selected during configuration. It is possible to carry out project analysis at any point during
your project to obtain information on project status and on progress made in testing or configuration.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 463/494
© SAP AG CR700 11-3
, 5. Final Preparation, Go Live & Support: Perform remote SAP services and track their status.
Monitor and manage your systems using real-time alerts displayed in a system graphic, weekly SAP
EarlyWatch Alert Reports and Central System Administration tasks.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 464/494
© SAP AG CR700 11-4
SAP AG 2004
How to Use SAP Solution Manager in a Project
Project
Preparation
Business
BlueprintRealization
Go Live &
Support
Final
Preparation
Project Definition and Description
Project type
Naming, roles, language
Project standards (Status, keywords, documentation types)
Timeframe
Define System Landscape
Development
Quality Assurance
Production
…
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 465/494
© SAP AG CR700 11-5
SAP AG 2004
How to Use SAP Solution Manager in a Project
Project
Preparation
Business
BlueprintRealization
Go Live &
Support
Final
Preparation
Define Business Blueprint via Business Process Repository
Customer Business Process requirements, analysis, documentation,and management / Scoping
Visualization of Standard Business Process by scenario description,product documentation, demos, and transactions
Project-specific adaptation, for example, new Processes,documentation at each level (Requirements, print outs, reports,concepts), …
Generation of Blueprint
Project Issue Management Status Management
SAP Feasibility Check
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 466/494
© SAP AG CR700 11-6
SAP AG 2004
How to Use SAP Solution Manager in a Project
Project
Preparation
Business
BlueprintRealization
Go Live &
Support
Final
Preparation
Configuration
Configuration guides for Standard Business Scenarios
Configuration support per scoped structure element, for example, productdocumentation, IMG, non-ABAP configuration, BC sets, and CATTs
Project documentation, for example, customizing, modification,enhancements
Customizing Synchronization
Testing
Define and maintain test cases, test catalog
Organize and perform testing in Test Workbench
Project Issue Management for example for questions errors
requests; Messages to SAP
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 467/494
© SAP AG CR700 11-7
SAP AG 2004
How to Use SAP Solution Manager in a Project
Project
Preparation
Business
BlueprintRealization
Go Live &
Support
Final
Preparation
End User Training and Documentation
Part of Implementation content
Standard Business Process and Customer Business Processdocumentation
Product documentation
Project Issue Management for example for errors
requests; Messages to SAP
SAP GoingLive Check
SAP EarlyWatch Check
Solution Manager for Operations
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 468/494
© SAP AG CR700 11-8
SAP AG 2004
Implementation Content
Structure items
for generic configuration
support
Scenarios
Solution
General Settings
Connecting Systems
Data Replication
Engines
Portals
Basic Settings for <Solution>
Basic Settings for <Key Capability>
Basic Settings for <Channel>
Basic Settings for <Technology>
<Product Version>
Configuration Structures
Master Data
Organizational Units
...
Business Processes
<Scenario>
<Scenario>
...
Scenarios
<Solution>
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 469/494
© SAP AG CR700 11-9
SAP AG 2004
Implementation Content: Assignments
Trans-
action
Docu-
mentationTransactions
IMG activities
Other
Docu-
mentation(in the Help
Portal)
IMG
Docu-
mentation
Link to
With
Access
to
URLsGeneral Settings
Connecting Systems
Data Replication
Engines
Portals
Basic Settings for <Solution>
Basic Settings for <Key Capability>
Basic Settings for <Channel>
Basic Settings for <Technology>
<Product Version>
Configuration Structures
Master Data
Organizational Units
...
Business Processes
<Scenario>
<Scenario>
...
Scenarios
<Solution>
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 470/494
© SAP AG CR700 11-10
SAP AG 2004
Example: Configuration Concept for mySAP CRM 4.0
Basic
Settings
for
Enterprise
Marketing
Basic
Settings
for
Enterprise
Sales
BasicBasic
SettingsSettings
for for
EnterpriseEnterprise
ServiceService
Basic
Settings
for
Enterprise
Analytics
Basic Settings for mySAP CRM
Basic
Settings
for
E-Comm.
Basic
Settings
for
Field
Appl.
Basic
Settings
for
Interaction
Center
Basic
Settings
for
Channel
Mgmt.
M o b i l e
C R M
M o b i l e
R / 3
H a n d h e l d C R M
W i n C l i e n t
W e b C l i e n t
I S A C R
M
I S A R / 3
Basic Settings for all Business Scenarios
Basic Settings for all Business Scenarios
assigned to a Functional Key Capability
Basic Settings for all Business Scenarios
assigned to a Channel Key Capability
Business Scenarios and assigned settings
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 471/494
© SAP AG CR700 11-11
SAP AG 2004
Example: Basic Settings for any Handheld ServiceBusiness Scenario*
Basic
Settings
for
Enterprise
Marketing
Basic
Settings
for
Enterprise
Sales
BasicBasic
SettingsSettings
for for
EnterpriseEnterprise
ServiceService
Basic
Settings
for
Enterprise
Analytics
Basic Settings for mySAP CRM
Basic
Settings
for
E-Comm.
Basic
Settings
for
Field
Appl.
Basic
Settings
for
Interaction
Center
Basic
Settings
for
Channel
Mgmt.
M o b i l e
C R M
M o b i l e
R / 3
H a n d h e l d C R M
W i n C l i e n t
W e b C l i e n t
I S A C R
M
I S A R / 3
* Including
Analysis
Processes
For each Business Scenario the
required path is given in the
SAP Solution Manager
a
b
d
e
c
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 472/494
© SAP AG CR700 12-1
mySAP CRM Detailed
View Newfunctionality andEnhancements forCRM Service
mySAP CRM
Detailed View
New functionality and
Enhancements for CRMService(SAP CRM 4.0 – Edition 2004)
Available with
IndustryExtensionsfor SAP CRM 4.0
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 473/494
© SAP AG CR700 12-2
SAP AG 2004
Content
Overview
New or Enhanced Functionalities
Logistics Integration
Amount Allocation
Service Billing in SAP ERP
Revenue Recognition
Further Information
Available with
Industry
Extensionsfor SAP CRM 4.0
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 474/494
© SAP AG CR700 12-3
SAP AG 2004
New – Logistics Integration
Assures that spare parts and external resources areavailable at the right place and time
Allows the integration of third party service providers
and suppliers
Covers the complete logistics chain
Enhanced – Amount allocation
Possible to now allocate costs (non-billable items) to internal
recipients (e.g. cost centers).
Several external (e.g. different customers) and internal (e.g. cost
centers) recipients are possible per item Advanced distribution of revenues and costs to the relevant
receivers before billing
Improved cost controlling by means of clear cost
assignments
Overview (1)
Available with
Industry Extensionsfor SAP CRM 4.0
Available with
Industry Extensionsfor SAP CRM 4.0
Logistics Integration Logistics integration within CRM service has been extended to include reservations, purchase
requisitions and purchase order creation from demand generated within CRM service documents. If
external resources are required for service work, a purchase requisition or purchase order can be
generated within SAP ERP procurement where the determination of the supplier will take place
automatically. A supplier can also be assigned directly from an external catalogue during the creation
of the service order.
Amount Allocation
Prior to the Service Industry Extensions for CRM 4.0 , the process “Amount Allocation” only took
revenues into consideration. This means that it was only possible to split revenues between different
external recipient and it was not possible to split costs in the same way. This enhanced version of this
process will now allow you to split the costs. In addition, you will also be able to split revenues between internal recipients such as Internal Order. For example, that 70% of the costs can be
transferred to the recipient of the warranty costs and the rest to the production facility. This is a major
improvement for internal cost controlling.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 475/494
© SAP AG CR700 12-4
SAP AG 2004
New – Service billing in SAP ERP
Use of already established SAP ERP billing infrastructure
for CRM Service processes (service contracts, serviceorders, confirmations)
Service initiation, planning and execution is carried out
in CRM
Billing and pricing configuration within SAP ERP can be
used for sales and now service
New - Revenue recognition for service contracts
CRM now with high degree of integration
into SAP ERP
Distribution of revenues according to thefiscal periods
Separation of revenue recognition from the billing
process
Overview (2)
Available with
Industry Extensionsfor SAP CRM 4.0
Available with
Industry Extensionsfor SAP CRM 4.0
Service Billing in SAP ERP Previously CRM service items could only be billed within CRM billing. Now with the SAP CRM 4.0
Edition 2004, we can use the existing processes in SAP ERP for billing CRM service items. Service
processing will still be handled within CRM, however, billing and pricing configuration within SAP
ERP can now be used for CRM service.
Revenue Recognition:
Many companies require that revenues are calculated according to time period. This means that the
revenues must be implemented in the posting period, in which the service was carried out, and not in the
posting period in which the billing document was set up. The revenue recognition function in the SAP
R/3 system helps you to fulfill these requirements and separate revenue recognition from the billing
process. The R/3 system offers a flexible solution to companies using various methods of revenue
recognition.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 476/494
© SAP AG CR700 12-5
SAP AG 2004
Assures that spare parts and external resources for service order processing are available at the right
place and time.
Allows the integration of third party service providersand suppliers
Logistical Options
Spare Parts
Reservation
Purchase Requisition
Purchase Order
External Resource
Purchase Requistion Purchase Order
Processing status of the logistical processes carriedout in SAP ERP can be monitored within the documentflow of the Service order.
Logistics Integration: Business Benefits Available with
Industry Extensionsfor SAP CRM 4.0
Procurement of spare parts and external resources within the service order is initiated based on: Item Category
Process Type
Service Organization
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 477/494
© SAP AG CR700 12-6
SAP AG 2004
Logistics Integration: Spare Parts
Spare Part
Items
Item Category
Process Type
Service
Organization
Procurement
Paramenters
Service
Order
SAP ERP
Logistical
OptionsCRM
Inbound Processing
Delivery
Goods Receipt
Service Order 781231
Reservation 2835
Purchase Requisition 443
Purchase Order 124334
Goods Receipt
Document Flow
Reservation
Purchase
Requisition
Purchase
Order
Available with
Industry Extensionsfor SAP CRM 4.0
If spare parts for processing a service order are required, it has to be sure that these spare parts are
available on the required date.
Depending on whether the spare part is already in stock or whether it first needs to be procured or even
manufactured, different logistic processes have to be carried out. The following options for procuring
spare parts will now be provided:
· Reservation
· Purchase requisition
· Purchase order
During the creation of the service order the user has the possibility to choose one of three options or the
system makes the choice based on different parameters (e.g. Item category, process type, service
organization). In Customizing, you define all the relationships and checks that the system uses to
determine and execute the required logistics scenario The determination of the source of supplier takes
place automatically in SAP ERP procurement, but it is also supports the assignment of the source ofsupplier directly from an external catalogue during the creation of the service order. This data will then
be transferred into SAP ERP.
After the creation of the service order it is possible to track the processing status of each individual item
within the document flow.
The procurement of external resources (e.g. technicians) works in a similar way, but please see next slide
for details and descriptions.
For details about the External Procurement, see the scenario or process description available under Gen.
Documentation.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 478/494
© SAP AG CR700 12-7
SAP AG 2004
Logistics Integration: External Resources
External
Resources
Item Category
Process Type
Service
Organization
Procurement
Paramenters
Service
Order
SAP ERP
LogisticalOptions
CRM
Service Entry
Sheet
Service Order 781231
Purchase Requisition 443
Purchase Order 124334
Document Flow
Purchase
Requisition
Purchase
Order
Available with
Industry Extensionsfor SAP CRM 4.0
If external resources for processing a service order are required, it has to be sure that these external
resources are available on the required date.
Depending on whether resources are already available or whether external resources need to be procured,
different logistic processes have to be carried out. The following options for procuring external resources
will now be provided:
Purchase requisition
Purchase order
During the creation of the service order the user has the possibility to choose one of three options or the
system makes the choice based on different parameters (e.g. item category, process type, service
organization). In Customizing, you define all the relationships and checks that the system uses to
determine and execute the required logistics scenario The determination of the source of supplier takes
place automatically in SAP ERP procurement, but it is also supports the assignment of the source of
supplier directly from an external catalogue during the creation of the service order. This data will then be transferred into SAP ERP.
After the creation of the service order it is possible to track the processing status of each individual item
within the document flow.
For details about the External Procurement, see the scenario or process description available under Gen.
Documentation.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 479/494
© SAP AG CR700 12-8
SAP AG 2003, Detailed View Service Contract & Entitlement Management / 1
Procurement: Spare Parts & External Resources
Header Document Flow
Line Item Document Flow
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 480/494
© SAP AG CR700 12-9
SAP AG 2004
Billable Non-Billable Items
Several external recipients (e.g. different customers) for billableitems (revenues)
Several internal recipients (e.g. cost centers) for non-billableitems (costs)
Advanced distribution of revenues and costs to therelevant receivers before billing
Possible to define shortly before billing takes place,who should pay which expenses
Prices are often defined at a very late stage -> flexible pricechanges are possible
Settlement information is not always known at the time of ordercreation
Checks and corrections can be performed shortly before billingtakes place
Change of billing relevance (for example, warranty, goodwill)
Change of invoice recipient
A field service employee can often not decide himself, howmuch the customer or the insurers should pay
Amount Allocation: Business Benefit Available with
Industry Extensionsfor SAP CRM 4.0
Prior to the Service Industry Extensions for CRM 4.0, the process “Amount Allocation” only takes
revenues into consideration. This means that it is possible to split revenues between different external
recipients, but it is not possible to split costs in the same way. With the Service Industry Extensions for
CRM 4.0 version, you will now be able to split the costs (non-billable). In addition, you will also be
able to split revenues (billable) between internal recipients such as Internal Order. For example, that 70%
of the costs can be transferred to the recipient of the warranty costs and the rest to the production facility.
This is a major improvement for internal cost controlling.
For details about the Flexible Billing of Service Processes using Billing Plan, see the scenario or process
description available under Gen. Documentation.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 481/494
© SAP AG CR700 12-10
SAP AG 2003, Detailed View Service Contract & Entitlement Management / 1
Amount Allocation: Business Benefit
Possibility to split items
Several external and internal recipients are possible per item
Splits and rules are inherited by various items
Flexible grouping possibilities
Grouping of items is possible, for example:
Customer pays completely for all materials, but only pays 50% of
the expenses for services
Grouping of items can be derived from the product type
The settlement of expenses is possible at different
times during the service process:
Settlement is performed monthly, even if the service has not yet
been completed
Settlement is performed once the service has been completed
Partial billing of services possible
Improved cost controlling by means of clear cost
assignments
Available with
Industry Extensionsfor SAP CRM 4.0
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 482/494
© SAP AG CR700 12-11
SAP AG 2004
Amount Allocation: Overview
Amount allocationAmount allocation
Allocation of revenue and costs
in ERP accounting
Allocation of revenue and costs
in ERP accountingBilling in CRM serviceBilling in CRM service
More than one receiver of revenues and
costs
More than one receiver of revenues and
costsBilling to more than one payer Billing to more than one payer
More types of receivers for revenues
and costs
More types of receivers for revenues
and costs
Splitting per percentage, quantity or
value
Splitting per percentage, quantity or
value
Revenues and costs per CRM item and
allocation per CRM item
Revenues and costs per CRM item and
allocation per CRM item
Splitting on header and item leveland splitting for groupsSplitting on header and item leveland splitting for groups
Late, changeable splitting by
billing request (shortly before billing)
Late, changeable splitting by
billing request (shortly before billing)
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 483/494
© SAP AG CR700 12-12
SAP AG 2004
R/3-FI/CO
CRM
Amount Allocation: Document and Data Flow
Serviceorder
Serviceconfirmation
Billingdue list
Billing request
with amount
allocation
Internal order
(cost collector)
Customer order Customer order
Internal order Internal order
Cost center Cost center
WBS elementWBS element
Profitability segmentProfitability segment
The diagram above represents the document flow and data flow for service order processing with amount
allocation.
The solid arrows in the diagram represent the document flow and the dashed arrows in the diagram
represent the data flow.
When the service order is created, if the controlling integration is turned on in CRM, an internal order is
created in ERP.
Within the service order, you have the opportunity to allocate billable (revenue) and non-billable (costs)
amounts to different receipients, but the data is not transferred to the internal order at this point.
When a follow-up service confirmation is created for the service order, the amount allocation
information within the service order is transferred to the service confirmation where you can update
amount allocation information. However, the amount allocation data is still not transferred to the internal
order at this point.
When a follow-up billing request is created for the service confirmation, the amount allocationinformation within the service confirmation is transferred to the Billing Request and within the Billing
Request, you have your last opportunity to update the amount allocation data before the amount
allocation data is sent to the ERP internal order.
Once the Billing Request document is saved, the billing request document is sent on to the billing due
list in CRM and the amount allocation data is transferred to the internal order in ERP and the associated
receivers.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 484/494
© SAP AG CR700 12-13
SAP AG 2004
Assumptions: confirmed quantity = 10 h, revenue = 1100 €, cost = 1000 €
One receiver for revenue and cost
Cost receiver is same as revenue receiver (PSG = profitability segment)
Amount Allocation: One Receiver
1000 €1100 €(100 %)PSG for
4711
PSG471110 h
CostRevenuePercen
-tage
Receiver Receiver
type
Payer Invoiced
quantity
ResultAmount Allocation
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 485/494
© SAP AG CR700 12-14
SAP AG 2004
Assumptions: confirmed quantity = 10 h, revenue = 1100 €, cost = 1000 €
Several receivers for revenue and cost
Cost receivers are the same as revenue receivers (PSG = profitability
segment)
Percentages for costs are calculated on a basis of invoiced quantities
Amount Allocation: Simple Split
600 €660 €60 %PSG for
4712
PSG47126 h
400 €440 €40 %PSG for 4711PSG47114 h
CostRevenuePercen-
tage
Receiver Receiver
type
Payer Invoiced
quantity
ResultAmount Allocation
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 486/494
© SAP AG CR700 12-15
SAP AG 2004
Assumptions: confirmed quantity = 10 h, cost = 1000 €
No revenue
Costs allocated (ORD = internal order)
Amount Allocation: No Billing, Only Costs
1000 €-costs
100 %
revenue0 %
9000ORD--
CostRevenuePercen-
tage
Receiver Receiver
type
Payer Invoiced
quantity
ResultAmount Allocation
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 487/494
© SAP AG CR700 12-16
SAP AG 2004
Assumptions: confirmed quantity = 10 h, revenue = 1100 €, cost = 1000 €
Invoiced quantity smaller than confirmed quantity
Costs completely allocated
Amount Allocation: Partly Billing, Complete Costs
200 €-co. 20 %
rev. 0 %
9000ORD--
500 €550 €50 %PSG for
4712
PSG47125 h
300 €330 €30 %PSG for
4711
PSG47113 h
CostReve-
nue
Percen-
tage
Receiver Receiver
type
Payer Invoiced
quantity
ResultAmount Allocation
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 488/494
© SAP AG CR700 12-17
SAP AG 2004
Use of already established SAP ERP billing infrastructure
for CRM Service processes (service contracts, service
orders, confirmations)
Service initiation, planning, and execution is carried out in CRM
Billing and pricing configuration within SAP ERP can be
used for sales and now service
Billing relevant items from CRM service orders, service contracts,
and service confirmations are transferred to the SAP ERP system
as a debit request where SAP ERP Billing can then be carried out
CRM Service Information Provided to the SAP ERP processes:
Spare Parts & Services
Business Partners
Pricing
Billing Date
Billing Methods
SAP ERP Billing - Current Solution
Available with
Industry Extensionsfor SAP CRM 4.0
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 489/494
© SAP AG CR700 12-18
SAP AG 2004
SAP ERP Billing - Overview
Data Transfer
SAP ERP
Sales
Billing
Billing
Document
Document Flow
Debit Request
Available with
Industry Extensionsfor SAP CRM 4.0
CRM
Service
Contract
Service Order
Service
Confirmation
Business
Partners
Spare Parts &
Services
Pricing
Billing Dates
Billing
Methods
Debit Request 1000032
Billing Document 9000002
Currently, it is only possible to bill service orders and service contracts in SAP CRM with the Billing
Engine. However, there is also a need to bill for these objects in SAP ERP, as this constitutes a system
and organizational infrastructure that is already implemented and functioning well, and should, for this
reason, be used for CRM processes too. The pricing infrastructure from SAP ERP, which is already used
for sales billing, can also be used for service billing.
Service initiation, planning, and execution will occur in the SAP CRM system. The service orders,
service contracts, and service confirmations themselves will be not replicated to SAP ERP. All billing-
relevant items from service orders, service contracts, and service confirmations will be transferred to a
debit request in SAP ERP. the CRM provides all information required such as business partner, spare
parts and services, pricing, billing dates. In addition to that, information about billing modalities will be
available. This ensures that new methods of payments will be supported:
Credit card
Cash sales / collection (encashment) For details about the Billing of Service Confirmations in R/3, see the scenario or process description
available under Gen. Documentation.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 490/494
© SAP AG CR700 12-19
SAP AG 2004
Service Contracts – Revenue Recognition
CRM now with high degree of integration
into SAP ERP
Well-known revenue recognition process
from SAP ERP can be addressed directly
with CRM data
Distribution of revenues according to
the fiscal periods
Time- and service-related revenue recognition available
Separation of revenue recognition from the billing process
Posting period of the billing document not necessarily the same as the
posting period for revenue recognition
Revenue Recognition enables companies to better manage
revenues across time
Available with
Industry
Extensionsfor SAP CRM 4.0
Revenue Recognition: Many companies require that revenues are calculated according to time period. This means that the
revenues must be implemented in the posting period, in which the service was carried out, and not in the
posting period in which the billing document was set up. The revenue recognition function in the SAP
R/3 system helps you to fulfill these requirements and separate revenue recognition from the billing
process. The R/3 system offers a flexible solution to companies using various methods of revenue
recognition.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 491/494
© SAP AG CR700 12-20
SAP AG 2004
Distinguish between two different cases:
Periodical billed contracts
Periods for contract invoices (scheduled in the contract-related billing
plan) differ from the fiscal periods
Time-related revenue recognition
Revenues are distributed in equal proportions in specific time periods
Target value/target quantity contracts
With service contracts it is often the case that services to be delivered
are predefined by:
Target quantity
Target value The point in time or the volume of the service consumption are different
Service-related revenue recognition
The revenues are realized on the basis of a specific event, e.g. a
maintenance on-site
Revenue recognition for service contracts
Available with
Industry Extensionsfor SAP CRM 4.0
Many companies require period-based accrual calculation of revenues. This means that revenue must be
realized in the posting period in which the service was rendered rather than in the posting period in
which the billing document was created. You can use the revenue recognition function to fullfill this
requirement by separating revenue recognition from the billing process.
The automatic transfer of data from business processes in SAP Customer Relationship Management
(SAP CRM) Service into an SAP R/3 Enterprise internal order makes it possible for you to use the
revenue recognition in SAP R/3 Enterprise.
Revenue recognition controls in how much revenue is to be reported in which posting period.
Revenue recognition allows you to post revenue to SAP Financial Accounting (SAP FI) independent of
billing documents, which are normally posted to revenue accounts. In this way, revenues can be posted
before, during, or after the actual billing.
Revenues can be realized on a periodic basis or on the basis of individual events:
Standard revenue realization means that billing documents are posted directly to a revenue account.This type of posting occurs without a revenue recognition process.
Time-based (periodic) revenue recognition means that the revenue of a sale is distributed and posted
evenly over the entire contract term. For this process, the billing document is posted to an accruals
account first and the revenues are transferred to the revenue accounts in a second step.
Service-related revenue recognition (value/quantity contract with target quantity) means that the
revenue is realized according to an event such as a service confirmation or a service order . Once again,
the billing document is posted to an accruals account first and the revenues are transferred to the
revenue accounts in a second step.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 492/494
© SAP AG CR700 12-21
SAP AG 2004
Periodical billed
contracts
Data of a service contract
which has be transferred
to SAP ERP for revenue
recognition:
Start/End date
Billing plan
The data will be stored
corresponding to the
existing internal order
Revenue recognition for service contracts
Servicedocument
Customerinvoice
Revenuerecognition
process
Receivable
12000
1000
1000
….
….
Accrued revenue
12000
Revenue
10001000
….
….
Time-related revenue recognition
1 2 3 45 6 7 8 9 10 11
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
12 13 14 15 16 17 18
26 27 28 29 30
Example of a time-related revenue recognition: You agree a contract with the customer and invoice the customer for the product with the help of a
periodic billing plan. The contract covers 12 periods and an amount of 12000. This means over 12
periods there is 1000 per contract period.
Service Contracts are often used as periodical billed contracts
However, the point in time of the service consumption is different. It can also be that the periods for
contract invoices scheduled in the contract-related billing plan differ from the fiscal periods, for
example, the contract invoices will be triggered quarterly and the fiscal periods are defined monthly.
In this case, the costs and the corresponding revenues accrue in different portions and in different periods
of the fiscal year. This results in an unbalanced periodical result.
Based on the following data of the service contract, it will be possible to transfer the data for the revenue
recognition into SAP ERP:
Contract Start date Contract End date
Billing plan: sum of billing request items
The following values are calculated in SAP ERP:
- Accrual quantity per posting period in percent (degree of revenue recognition) = 100 / number of
posting periods.
- Realized revenue per period = Accrual quantity per posting period in percent * Planned revenue
- The planned revenue is equal to the sum of the billing request items.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 493/494
© SAP AG CR700 12-22
SAP AG 2004
Target value/target
quantity contracts
Data of a service contract
which has be transferred
to SAP ERP for revenue
recognition:
Start/End date
Billing plan
Target quantity/value
The data will be stored
corresponding to the
existing internal order
Revenue recognition for service contracts
Service
Contract15000
Customer
invoice15000
Revenuerecognition
process
Receivable
15000
3000
600
Accrued revenue
15000
Revenue
Serviceorder
9000
3000
600
Productdelivery
600
Service
3000
Service-related revenue recognition
Example of service-related revenue recognition: You agree a service contract with a customer and the whole amount is invoiced at the beginning of the contract’s
validity. You can however only carry out recognitions if the agreed services are actually carried out. If the whole
contract amounts to 15000 and the value of each individual service 3000, each time you carry out a service, the
value is 3000. If you carry out the service once, the remaining 12000 counts as credit on a deferred revenue
account, until you have carried out the remaining services.
Service contracts are often created as value/quantity contracts. So they contain:
Target quantity
Target value
However, the volume of the service consumption is different. So the costs and revenues must not be in the same
fiscal period. To avoid this and get a balanced periodical result you can use the Revenue Recognition.
Based on the following data of the service contract, it will be possible to transfer the data for the revenue
recognition into SAP ERP:
Target value from the service contract items
Contract Start and Contract End dates
Release values from Service Orders
The following values are calculated in SAP ERP:
Accrual quantity per posting period in percent (degree of revenue recognition) = Release value per posting
period / target value * 100
Realized revenue per period = Accrual quantity per posting period in percent * Planned Revenue
The planned revenue is equal to the target value.
8/15/2019 Cr 700 Crm Service (Crm4.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr-700-crm-service-crm40 494/494
Revenue recognition for service contracts
Methods for
profitability analysis
to evaluate…
CRM Service planning and processing SAP ERP Financials
Service order
(contract related)
Service order
item
Service contract
Servicecontract item
Service confirmation
(contract related)
Serviceconfirm. item
Used resources:
spare parts,
services,expenses, …
Billing
Invoicing of billing-relevant service items
Internal order
Actual costs
Actual revenues• Start date
• End date
• Target value/quantity
• Billing plan
Requested
values/
quantities
Contract related
information/rules
for revenuerecognition
Accounts receivable
Deferred revenue
Unbilled receivables
Revenue